6ES5458-2BR11 - Siemens - Product.Network

Preface, Contents
Part 1: User information
System Overview 1
Technical Description 2
Mechanical and Electrical 
Installation 3
Configuration and 
Parameterization 4
Status and Error Diagnostics 5
Part 2: Reference information
General Technical Specifications 6
Digital Modules 7
Analog Modules 8
Appendices
Type Files and GSD Files A
Configuration Telegram B
Parameterization Telegram C
Configuring with
COM ET 200 V4.x D
Analog Modules and Old Type
Files E
Order Numbers F
Glossary, Index
Edition 04
EWA 4NEB 812 6089-02c
ET 200B 
Distributed I/O Station
Manual
SIMATIC

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c

This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as

well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the

manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:

!Danger

indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper

precautions are not taken.

!Warning

indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper

precautions are not taken.

!Caution

indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Note

draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or

to a particular part of the documentation.

The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified

persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,

equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Note the following:

!Warning

This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the

technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers

which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.

This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed

correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

SIMATICand SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.

Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the own-

er’s rights may be violated if they are used be third parties for their own purposes.

We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the

hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be pre-

cluded entirely , we cannot guarantee full agreement. However , the

data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary cor-

rections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improve-

ment are welcomed.

Technical data subject to change.

 Siemens AG 1995

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.

Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights

created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are

reserved.

Siemens AG

Automation Group

Industrial Automation Systems

P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuremberg

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6ES5 998-4ET21

Safety Guidelines

Qualified Personnel

Correct Usage

Trademarks

이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.

iii
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
Preface
The information contained in this manual will allow you:
To install, wire and start up the ET 200B distributed I/O station.
To find module characteristics and technical specifications quickly and
easily.
The following explains the structure of the contents of the manual:
Which control and display 
elements does the ET 200B have?
How is the ET 200B installed?
How do I configure 
and parameterize the ET 200B?
Faults?
Technical Specifications?
Chap. 2
Chap. 3
Chap. 4
Chap. 5
Chap. 6, 7, 8
What is the ET 200B? Chap. 1
How are configuration and
parameterization telegrams structured? Appendix B, C
Which type files do I need? Appendix A
This manual describes all the ET 200B modules which can be accessed with
the PROFIBUS-DP bus protocol. These ET 200B modules all have order
numbers starting with 6ES7 (see  Section F.1).
This manual is valid for operation of the ET 200B with:
IM 308-B master interface module and COM ET 200 V4.x
IM 308-C master interface module and COM ET 200 WINDOWS
S7/M7-DP master with PROFIBUS-DP interface and STEP 7
other  PROFIBUS-DP masters from Siemens and other vendors.
You can also order the documentation for the ET 200B distributed I/O station
as an electronic manual on CD-ROM.
In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master
used (see Appendix F.2).
Purpose of the
Manual
Contents of the
Manual
Scope of the
Manual
Electronic Manuals
Other Requisite
Manuals

iv ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following organizational conventions are used in this manual to make it

easier for you to find specific information:

At the front of the manual is a complete table of contents, together with a

list of all the figures and tables contained in the manual.

The left-hand column of each page in the individual chapters has head-

ings to help you find information more quickly.

The Appendix is followed by a glossary containing definitions of the most

important technical terms used in the manual.

At the end of the manual is a detailed index which you can use to refer to

specific sections.

The ET200B distributed I/O station is based on the PROFIBUS standard

(EN 50170, Part 1) and the PROFIBUS-DP standard (EN 50170, Part 3).

Our ”KO-ET 200” workshop is the ideal way to get to know the ET 200 dis-

tributed I/O system.

If you would like more information, please contact your regional Training

Center or the following address:

Product Marketing for SIMATIC, SINEC and COROS

AUT 951

Frau Lades

Postfach 4848

D-90327 Nürnberg

Tel.: +49 (911) 895-3154

Fax: +49 (911) 895-5021

Please direct all technical queries to your Siemens contact partner in the of-

fice responsible for your area. You can look up the addresses in the manuals

for the CPUs, for example in the ”Siemens Worldwide” appendix of the

manual S7-300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation, in cata-

logs and in CompuServe (go autforum).

You may prefer to use our hotline support; the number to dial is

+49 (911) 895-7000 (fax 7001).

If you need type files or GSD files, the modem number to dial is

+49 (911) 737972.

If you have any questions or comments on this manual, please complete the

suggestions form and return it to us. You will find this form at the back of the

manual.

Organizational

Conventions

Standards

Courses

Queries

Preface

v
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
Contents
System Overview
1 What is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System? 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 What is the ET 200B? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.1 Terminal Block 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.2 Electronics Block 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Technical Description
1 Design of the Terminal Block 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 Design of the Electronics Block 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
1 Installing and Setting the Terminal Block 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 Installing the Electronics Block 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3 Dismantling the Terminal Block and the Electronics Block 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4 Electrical Installation 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.1 Grounded Configuration 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.2 Ungrounded Configuration 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5 Wiring the Terminal Block 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
6 Wiring the Bus Interface 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Configuration and Parameterization
1 Configuration Options 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 Requirements for Configuration 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3 Where to Find the Requisite Information? 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Status and Error Diagnostics
1 Possible Response on Startup 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 Status and Error Indication by LEDs 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3 Slave Diagnostics 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.1 General Information on Slave Diagnostics, Operation with IM 308-C 5-6. . . . 
3.2 General Information on Slave Diagnostics, Operation with S7/M7
DP Masters (STEP 7) or Other PROFIBUS-DP Masters 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.4 Structure of Station Status 1 to 3 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.5 Structure of the Master Station Number and the Manufacturer ID 5-13. . . . . . . 
3.6 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Digital ET 200B) 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.7 Structure of ID-related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B) 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.8 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B) 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . 

vi ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
General Technical Specifications
Digital Modules
1 Digital Modules 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 Terminal Blocks 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.1 Terminal Block TB1/DC (6ES7 193-0CA10-0XA0) 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.2 Terminal Block TB1-4/DC (6ES7 193-0CA20-0XA0) 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.3 Terminal Block TB3/DC (6ES7 193-0CA30-0XA0) 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.4 Terminal Block TB2/DC (6ES7 193-0CB10-0XA0) 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.5 Terminal Block TB2-4/DC (6ES7 193-0CB20-0XA0) 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.6 Terminal Block TB4/DC (6ES7 193-0CB30-0XA0) 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.7 Terminal Block TB4M/DC (6ES7 193-0CE30-0XA0) 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.8 Terminal Block TB6/AC (6ES7 193-0CC10-0XA0) 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2.9 Terminal Block and Bus Connector 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3 Electronics Blocks 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.1 Electronics Block ET  200B-16DI (6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0) 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.2 Electronics Blocks ET  200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and
ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms (6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0) 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.3 Electronics Block ET  200B-16DO (6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0) 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . 
3.4 Electronics Block ET  200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0) 7-32. . . . . . . . 
3.5 Electronics Block ET  200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0) 7-38. . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.6 Electronics block ET  200B-8RO (6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0) 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.7 Electronics Block ET  200B-8DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0) 7-49. . . . . . . . . 
3.8 Electronics Block ET  200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0) 7-55. . . . 
3.9 Electronics Block ET  200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133 0BL00-0XB0) 7-62. . . . . . . 
3.10 Electronics Blocks ET  200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0) and
ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms (6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0) 7-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3.11 Electronics Block ET  200B-16DI-AC (6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0) 7-74. . . . . . . . . 
3.12 Electronics Block ET  200B-16DO-AC (6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0) 7-79. . . . . . . . 
3.13 Electronics Block ET  200B-16RO-AC (6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0) 7-84. . . . . . . . 
3.14 Electronics Block ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC (6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0) 7-89. . . . . 
Analog Modules
1 Analog Modules 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2 Terminal Block TB8 (6ES7 193-0CD40-0XA0) 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3 Terminal Block TB8 and Bus Connector 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4 Electronics Block ET  200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0) 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.1 Connecting Transducers 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.2 Configuration Options 8-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.3 Setting the Operating Mode 8-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.4 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S5 8-26. . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.5 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S7 8-39. . . . . . . . . . . . 
4.6 Block Diagram, Terminal Assignment and Technical Data 8-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5 Electronics Block ET  200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0) 8-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5.1 Connecting Transducers 8-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5.2 Configuration Options 8-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5.3 Setting the Operating Mode 8-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5.4 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S5 8-65. . . . . . . . . . . . 
5.5 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S7 8-70. . . . . . . . . . . . 
5.6 Block Diagram, Terminal Assignment and Technical Data 8-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

vii
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
8.6 Electronics Block ET  200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0) 8-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8.6.1 Connecting Loads 8-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8.6.2 Configuration Options 8-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8.6.3 Setting the Operating Mode 8-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8.6.4 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S5 8-85. . . . . . . . . . . . 
8.6.5 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S7 8-87. . . . . . . . . . . . 
8.6.6 Block Diagram, Terminal Assignment and Technical Data 8-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A Type Files and GSD Files
A.1 Type Files of the ET 200B Modules A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A.2 GSD Files of the ET 200B Modules A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
B Configuration Telegram
C Parameterization Telegram
C.1 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C.2 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram C-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C.3 Parameters for Status C-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C.4 Parameters for Analog Input Modules C-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C.5 Parameters for Analog Output Module C-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x
D.1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D.2 Slave Diagnostics D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D.2.1 General Information on Slave Diagnostics, Operation with IM 308-B D-4. . . . 
D.2.2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics D-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D.2.3 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B) D-8. . . . . . . . . . . . 
D.3 Configuration Options D-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D.4 Setting the Operating Mode with COM ET 200 V4.x D-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E Analog Modules and Old Type Files
E.1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E.2 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B) E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . 
E.3 Configuration Options E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E.4 Parameters for Analog Modules E-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F Order Numbers
F.1 Order Numbers for ET 200B Components F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F.2 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS-DP Accessories F-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

viii ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
Figures
1-1 Typical PROFIBUS-DP Configuration with SIMATIC S5/S7/M7 1-2. . . . . . . . . 
1-2 Components of ET 200B 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2-1 The TB1/DC 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2-2 The TB8 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
2-3 ET 200B-16DI Electronics Block 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-1 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI, 16DO, 8DI/8DO,
8DI/8DO HWA, 8RO and 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO Electronics Blocks
(without Shield Connecting Element) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-2 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI-AC, 16DO-AC,
32DI, 16DO/2A, 32DO, 16DI/16DO, 24DI/8DO, 16RO-AC and
8DI/8RO-AC Electronics Blocks 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-3 Clearances Required for Installation of the 4/8AI, 4AI and 4AO
Electronics Blocks (with Shield Connecting Element) 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-4 Hanging the Terminal Block on the Standard Sectional Rail and
Setting the Coding Slide Switch 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-5 Mounting the Shield Connecting Element on the
Standard Sectional Rail 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-6 Mounting the Terminal Block on the Shield Connecting Element 3-8. . . . . . . . 
3-7 Changing the Setting of the Coding Plug 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-8 Engaging the Electronics Block on the Terminal Block 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-9 Dismantling the ET 200B 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-10 Both Screws Tightened in a Grounded Configuration 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-11 Grounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the ET 200B 3-18. . . 
3-12 Grounded Configuration for 120/230 V AC Digital Modules 
of the ET 200B 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-13 Upper Screw Removed in an Ungrounded Configuration 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-14 Ungrounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the 
ET 200B 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-15 Connecting Cables to Spring-Latch Terminals 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-16 Shield  Connecting Element on Terminal Block TB8 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-1 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-3 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics)for Digital
ET200B (Byte 6) 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-4 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Digital
ET 200B (Byte 7) 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-5 Structure of the Header (ID-related Diagnostics)for Analog
ET200B (Byte 6) 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-6 Structure of ID-related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 7, 8) 5-16. . . . 
5-7 Structure of ID-related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 7, 8)
in the Event of an Error in the Configuration Telegram 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-8 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics)for Analog
ET200B (Byte 9) 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-9 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B
(Bytes 10 to 28) 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-1 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB1/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier) 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-2 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB1/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier) 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-3 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB1-4/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 4-Tier) 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

ix
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
7-4 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB1-4/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal,4-Tier) 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-5 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB3/DC
(Spring-Latch Terminal) 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-6 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB3/DC
(Spring-Latch Terminal) 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-7 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB2/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier) 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-8 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB2/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier) 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-9 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB2-4/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 4-Tier) 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-10 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB2-4/DC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 4-Tier) 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-11 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB4/DC
(Spring-Latch Terminal) 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-12 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB4/DC
(Spring-Latch Terminal) 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-13 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB4M/DC
(Spring-Latch Terminal) 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-14 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB4M/DC
(Spring-Latch Terminal) 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-15 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB6/AC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier) 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-16 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB6/AC
(Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier) 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-17 Dimensional  Drawing: Side Elevation with Bus Connector
(6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 and 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0) 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-18 Dimensional  Drawing: ET 200B-16DI  7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-19 Connection  Diagram: ET 200B-16DI 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-20 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DI and TB1/DC or TB3/DC 7-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-21 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DI and TB1-4/DC 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-22 Dimensional  Drawing: ET 200B-32DI and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 7-20. . . . . . . . 
7-23 Connection  Diagram: ET 200B-32DI and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 7-20. . . . . . . . . 
7-24 Block Diagram: ET 200B-32DI or ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms and
TB2/DC or TB4/DC 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-25 Block Diagram: ET 200B-32DI or ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms and 
TB2-4/DC 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-26 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DO 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-27 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DO and TB1/DC or TB3/DC 7-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-28 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DO and TB1-4/DC 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-29 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DO/2A 7-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-30 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DO/2A and TB2/DC or TB4/DC 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . 
7-31 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DO/2A and TB2-4/DC 7-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-32 Front Elevation: ET 200B-32DO 7-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-33 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-32DO and TB2/DC or TB4/DC 7-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-34 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-32DO and TB2-4/DC 7-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-35 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8RO 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-36 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8RO and TB1/DC or TB3/DC 7-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-37 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8RO and TB1-4/DC 7-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-38 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8DI/8DO 7-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-39 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO and TB1/DC or TB3/DC 7-50. . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

xET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
7-40 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO and TB1-4/DC 7-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-41 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA 7-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-42 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA and TB1/DC or TB3/DC 7-56. . . . . . . 
7-43 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA and TB1-4/DC 7-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-44 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DI/16DO 7-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-45 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DI/16DO and TB2/DC or TB4/DC 7-63. . . . . . . . . . 
7-46 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DI/16DO and TB2-4/DC 7-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-47 Front Elevation: ET 200B-24DI/8DO and ET  200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms  7-68. . . . 
7-48 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-24DI/8DO or ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms 
and TB2/DC or TB4/DC 7-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-49 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-24DI/8DO or ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms 
and TB2-4/DC 7-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-50 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DI-AC 7-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-51 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DI-AC and TB6/AC 7-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-52 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DO-AC 7-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-53 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16DO-AC and TB6/AC 7-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-54 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16RO-AC 7-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-55 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-16RO-AC and TB6/AC 7-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-56 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC 7-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-57 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC and TB6/AC 7-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-1 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB8 (Spring-Latch Terminals) 8-3. . . . 
8-2 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB8 (Spring-Latch Terminals) 8-3. . . . . 
8-3 Dimensional Drawing: Side Elevation with Bus Connectors
(6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 and 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0) 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-4 Dimensional Drawing: ET 200B-4/8AI 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-5 Connection Diagram: ET 200B-4/8AI 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-6 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box
(Floating- Ground Measurement) 8-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-7 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box per
Channel (Floating-Ground Measurement) 8-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-8 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box (Ground-Refer-
enced Measurement) 8-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-9 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 2-Wire
Connections (Floating-Ground Measurement) 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-10 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 2-Wire
Connections (Ground-Referenced Measurement) 8-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-11 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 4-Wire
Connections (Floating-Ground Measurement) 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-12 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 4-Wire
Connections (Ground-Referenced Measurement) 8-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-13 2-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4/8AI
(Floating-Ground Measurement) 8-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-14 2-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4/8AI
(Ground-Referenced Measurement) 8-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-15 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-4/8AI and TB8 8-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-16 Front Elevation: ET 200B-4AI 8-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-17 Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors toET 200B-4AI
(Floating-Ground Measurement) 8-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-18 Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4AI
(Ground-Referenced Measurement) 8-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-19 Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors
(Floating-Ground Measurement) 8-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

xi
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
8-20 Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors
(Ground-Referenced Measurement) 8-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-21 Connection of 2-Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor 8-59. . . . . . . . 
8-22 Connection of 4-Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor
or Voltage Sensor 8-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-23 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-4AI and TB8 8-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-24 Front Elevation: ET 200B-4AO 8-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-25 4-Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output 8-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-26 2-Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output 8-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-27 2-Wire Connection of Loads for Current Output 8-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-28 Block  Diagram: ET 200B-4AO and TB8 8-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-1 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for
Digital ET 200B modules C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-2 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for
Analog ET 200B Modules C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-3 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram C-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-4 Parameters for Status C-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-5 Parameters for Analog Input Modules 4/8AI, 4AI C-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-6 Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Input Modules 4/8AI, 4AI C-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-7 Bytes 22 and 35 for Analog Input Modules 4/8AI, 4AI C-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-8 Parameters for Analog Output Module 4AO C-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-9 Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Output Module 4AO C-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-10 Bytes 22 to 35 for Analog Output Module 4AO C-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-1 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics)
for Analog ET200B D-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-2 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B
(Bytes 7 to 15) D-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-1 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics)
for Analog ET200B E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-2 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B
(Bytes 7 to 24) E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

xii ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
Tables
1-1 ET 200B: Range of Applications  1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-1 Assignment of the Electronics Blocks to the Coding Slide Switch 3-9. . . . . . . 
3-2 Approved Fuses for Terminal Blocks 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-3 Approved Conductor Cross-sections  3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-4 Pin Assignments of the Terminal Blocks 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-5 Bus Connectors 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
3-6 Pin Assignment of the PROFIBUS-DP Interface 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
4-1 Type File Versions and Applications  4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-1 LEDs on Digital ET 200B Modules and their Meanings 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-2 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings  5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnostics  5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-4 Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0) 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-5 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1)  5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-6 Structure of the Master Station Number (Byte 3) 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-7 Structure of the Manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-8 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics and Process Alarms  5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-9 Possible Values for Byte 13 in Diagnostics Alarm 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-10 Bytes 17 to 28 for Diagnostics Alarm  5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
5-11 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input/Analog Output Channel 5-21. . . . . . . . . . 
7-1 ET 200B Digital Electronics Blocks 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-2 ET 200B Digital Terminal Blocks  7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-3 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC
for ET 200B-16DI  7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-4 Pin AssignmentofTerminal
BlocksTB2/DC,TB2-4/DC,TB4/DCandTB4M/DCforET 200B-32DI 
and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-5 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC
for ET 200B-16DO 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-6 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC; TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC
and TB4M/DC for ET  200B-16DO/2A 7-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-7 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC
and TB4M/DC for ET 200B-32DO 7-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-8 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC
for ET 200B-8RO 7-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-9 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC
for ET  200B-8DI/8DO 7-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-10 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC
for ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA 7-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-11 Truth for Hardware Cutoff of ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA  7-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-12 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC
and TB4M/DC for ET 200B-16DI/16DO 7-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-13 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC; TB2-4/DC and TB4/DC
for ET 200B-24DI/8DO and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms 7-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
7-14 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16DI-AC  7-76. . . . . . 
7-15 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16DO-AC  7-81. . . . . 
7-16 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16RO-AC  7-86. . . . . 
7-17 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC  7-91. . . 
8-1 Analog Electronics Blocks of ET 200B 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-2 Analog Terminal Block of ET 200B 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-3 Compensating Box Type U with Current Stabilizer. 8-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-4 Reference Junction with Built-in Power Supply Unit 8-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

xiii
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
8-5 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET  200B-4/8AI,
with only Voltage Sensors and Thermocouples Connected 8-20. . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-6 Possible IDs for Configuring the Input Areas of ET  200B-4/8AI,
with only Thermal resistors and Resistors Connected 8-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-7 Example for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B-4/8AI 8-22. . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-8 Assignment of Terminals to Channel Groups 8-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-9 Parameters for ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)  8-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-10 Representation  of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern
(6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0) 8-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-11 Description of the Bits (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0) 8-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-12 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
(Measuring Ranges:  80 mV,  250 mV,  500 mV
and  1000 mV; Complement of Twos) 8-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-13 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
(Measuring Ranges:  80 mV,  250 mV,  500 mV and
 1000 mV; Amount and Sign) 8-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-14 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
for Resistance Measurement (Complement of Twos) 8-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-15 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
for Resistance Thermometers (Complement of Twos) 8-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-16 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors (Complement of Twos) 8-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-17 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type E Thermocouples (Nickel-Chrome/
Copper-Nickel, to IEC 548, Part 1; Complement of Twos) 8-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-18 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization: Type J Thermocouple (Iron/Copper-Nickel
(Constantan), to IEC 584) (Complement of Twos) 8-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-19 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization: Type K Thermocouples (Nickel-Chrome/
Nickel-Aluminum, to IEC 584) (Complement of Twos) 8-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-20 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization: Type L Thermocouples (Iron/Copper-Nickel
(Constantan), to DIN 43710) (Complement of Twos) 8-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-21 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type N Thermocouples (Nickel-Chrome-Silicium/
Nickel-Silicium, to IEC 548-1; Complement of Twos) 8-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-22 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type T Thermocouples
(Copper/Copper-Nickel, to IEC 548, Part 1; Complement of Twos) 8-37. . . . . . 
8-23 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type U Thermocouples (Copper/Copper-Nickel,
to DIN 43710; Complement of Twos) 8-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-24 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for
SIMATIC S7 and ET 200B-4/8AI 8-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-25 Possible Resolutions of Analog Values: ET  200B-4/8AI 8-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-26 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
(Measuring Ranges:  80 mV,  250 mV,  500 mV
and  1000 mV) 8-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-27 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
for Resistance Measurement 8-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-28 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
Contents

xiv ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
for Pt 100 Resistance Sensors 8-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-29 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors 8-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-30 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type E Thermocouples 8-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-31 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type J Thermocouples 8-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-32 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type K Thermocouples 8-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-33 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type L Thermocouples 8-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-34 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type N Thermocouples 8-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-35 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type T Thermocouples 8-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-36 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI
with Linearization; Type U Thermocouples 8-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-37 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET  200B-4/8AI 8-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-38 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200B-4AI 8-61. . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-39 Assignment of Terminals to Channels 8-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-40 Parameters for ET 200B-4AI)  8-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-41 Representation  of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern
(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0) 8-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-42 Description  of the Bits (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0) 8-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-43 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V ;
Complement of Twos) 8-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-44 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V ;
Amount and Sign) 8-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-45 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V ; Binary) 8-67. . . . . . . 
8-46 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Range:  20 mA; Complement of Twos) 8-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-47 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Range:  20 mA; Amount and Sign) 8-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-49 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Range: 0 ... 20 mA) 8-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-50 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Range: 4 ... 20 mA) 8-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-51 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for
SIMATIC S7 and ET 200B-4AI 8-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-52 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V and  10 V) 8-70. . . . . . . . . . 
8-53 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Range:  20 mA) 8-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-54 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI
(Measuring Ranges: 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA) 8-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-55 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B-4AI 8-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-56 Possible Configurations for the Output Areas of ET 200B-4AO 8-82. . . . . . . . . 
8-57 Assignment of Terminals to Channels 8-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-58 Parameters for ET 200B-4AO 8-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

xv
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
8-59 Representation  of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern
(6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0) 8-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-60 Description  of the Bits (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0) 8-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-61 Analog  Output Signals of the ET 200B-4AO (Value Ranges:
 10 V, 0 ... 10 V,  20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA;
Complement of Twos) 8-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-62 Representation  of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern for
SIMATIC S7 and ET 200B-4AO 8-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-63 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AO
(Output Ranges: 0 to 10 V and  10 V) 8-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-64 Representation  of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AO
(Output Ranges:  20 mA, 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA) 8-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
8-65 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B-4AO 8-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A-1 Designations of Type Files for Digital Modules A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A-2 Designations of Type Files for Analog Modules A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A-3 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for
ET 200B-16DI, ET 200B-32DI, ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms,
ET 200B-16DO, ET 200B-16DO/2A A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A-4 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-32DO,
ET 200B-8RO, ET 200B-8DI/8DO, ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA A-6. . . . . . . . . . . 
A-5 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-16DI/16DO,
ET 200B-24DI/8DO, ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
A-6 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-16DI-AC,
ET 200B-16DO-AC, ET 200B-16RO-AC, ET  200B-8DI/8RO-AC A-8. . . . . . . . 
A-7 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-4/8AI,
ET 200B-4AI, ET 200B-4AO A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
B-1 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Digital ET 200B Modules  B-2. . . 
B-2 IDs for Digital ET 200B Modules  B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
B-3 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Analog ET 200B Modules B-3. . . 
B-4 IDs for Analog ET 200B Modules  B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-1 Assignment of Terminals to Channel (Groups) C-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-2 Codings for the Integration Times of the 4/8AI C-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-3 Codings for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules  C-8. . . . . . . 
C-4 Assignment of Terminals to Channels C-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
C-5 Codings for Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module C-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings  D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B,
Operation with IM 308-B D-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B,
Operation with IM 308-B D-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-4 Diagnostics Data, Bytes 9 to 12 D-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-5 Possible Values for Byte 9 D-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-6 Diagnostics Data, Bytes 13 to 15 D-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-7 IDs for ET 200B D-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
D-8 Content and Meanings of the Bytes in the
Parameterization Telegram  D-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings  E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-2 Diagnostics Data, Bytes 9 to 12 E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-3 Possible Values for Byte 9 E-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-4 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics Alarm  E-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-5 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input/Analog Output Channel E-6. . . . . . . . . . 
E-6 Possible IDs for Configuring Input and Output and Areas E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

xvi ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
E-7 Parameters for ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)  E-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-8 Parameters for ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)  E-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
E-9 Parameters for ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0) E-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F-1 Order Numbers, Electronics Blocks for ET 200B  F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F-2 Order Numbers, Terminal Blocks for ET 200B F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F-3 Order Numbers, Labeling Strips F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F-4 Accessories for the ET  200 Distributed I/O System F-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F-5 Manuals for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
F-6 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
Contents

1-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

System Overview

The System Overview gives you information on the following:

In Section you will find on Page

1.1 What is the ET 200 distributed I/O system? 1-2

1.2 What is ET 200B? 1-3

In this Chapter

1-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

1.1 What is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System?

The ET 200 distributed I/O system is based on the PROFIBUS standard

(EN 50170, Part 1) and the PROFIBUS-DP standard (EN 50170, Part 3).

The field bus on which the ET 200 distributed I/O system is based is a ver-

sion of PROFIBUS known as PROFIBUS-DP (DP = Dezentrale Peripherie, or

distributed I/O). This version is designed for minimum reaction times in

communication with the distributed inputs and outputs.

The distributed input/output system consists of active stations (DP masters)

and passive stations (DP slaves) interconnected by the PROFIBUS-DP field

bus.

DP master

DP slaves

S7-300/M7-300 S7-400/M7-400 PG/PC

ET 200MET 200CET 200B S5-95U

S5-95U

PROFIBUS-DP

Field devices

S5-115/135/155U

STEP 7

COM ET 200

Figure 1-1 Typical PROFIBUS-DP Configuration with SIMATIC S5/S7/M7

SINEC L2-DP is the PROFIBUS-DP from Siemens.

Definition

The Components

of ET 200

SINEC L2-DP =

PROFIBUS-DP

System Overview

1-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

1.2 What is the ET 200B?

The ET 200B (B stands for ”block I/O”) belongs to the ET 200 distributed

I/O system with the PROFIBUS-DP field bus. ET 200B is a DP slave having

IP 20 protection.

The ET 200B distributed I/O station incorporates an integral port for connec-

tion to the PROFIBUS-DP bus and digital or analog inputs/outputs.

The range of modules for the ET 200B includes:

24 V DC digital modules

120/230 V AC digital modules

Analog modules

Thanks to its compact and flat design, the ET 200B distributed I/O station is

primarily suited to applications where space is a priority.

The ET 200B distributed I/O station can be mounted either on a standard sec-

tional rail or directly onto the wall. Vertical and horizontal installation are

both possible.

The ET 200B consists of 2 parts: the terminal block and the electronics

block.

The terminal block (TB) incorporates the permanent wiring and does not con-

tain any function-related electrical components. The electronics block is at-

tached to the terminal block. The electronics block (EB) contains the logic

circuits.

The terminal block and the electronics block have matching mechanical cod-

ing elements to prevent destruction of the electronics block.

Terminal block

Electronics block

ET 200B

Figure 1-2 Components of ET 200B

Definition

Range of Modules

Application

Components

System Overview

1-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

All ET 200B modules can be addressed with the PROFIBUS-DP bus proto-

col.

ET 200B can be operated with the following systems:

Table 1-1 ET 200B: Range of Applications

In system Operating with Configurable with

SIMATIC S5 IM 308-B master interface (release

5 and higher) COM ET 200 V4.x

version 4.0 and higher:

digital modules

version 4.1 and higher:

analog modules

IM 308-C master interface (release

1 and higher) COM ET 200 Windows

(version 1.0 and higher)

SIMATIC S7/M7 S7/M7 DP master with integral

PROFIBUS-DP interface STEP 7

version 2.0 and higher:

digital modules

version 3.0 and higher:

analog modules

Theanalog modules of ET200B can be operated as S7 slaves in conjunction

with SIMATIC S7/ M7 and STEP 7 (V3.0 and higher). This means that all the

functions of the central S7 I/O modules are also at your disposal for the

ET 200B analog modules.

The next sections of this chapter contain an overview of the components of

ET 200B.

In Section you will find on Page

1.2.1 Terminal Block 1-5

1.2.2 Electronics Block 1-6

Compatible with

S7 Slave

The Next Sections

System Overview

1-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

1.2.1 Terminal Block

The terminal block incorporates the permanent wiring.

The terminal block has the following characteristics:

The supply voltage for the electronics block (logic) can be switched on/

off (except for the TB6/AC terminal block).

The terminal block can be mounted both on standard sectional rails and

on smooth surfaces, so direct wall mounting is possible.

The PROFIBUS-DP bus is interfaced via a SINEC L2 bus connector.

Station numbers between 00 and 99 can be set with the aid of a tool such

as a screwdriver:

– When operating with an IM 308-B master interface, station numbers

3 to 99 are permissible.

– When operating with an IM 308-C master interface or with an S7/M7

DP master, station numbers 1 to 99 are permissible.

Definition

Characteristics

System Overview

1-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

1.2.2 Electronics Block

The electronics block contains the logic circuits and is plugged onto the ter-

minal block.

The electronics block has the following characteristics:

There is galvanic isolation between the PROFIBUS-DP bus and the inter-

nal electronics.

The block has LEDs for indicating the following:

– Voltage supply to the logic circuits (RUN)

– Bus fault (BF)

– Group diagnostics: short-circuit, wire break or load voltage failure

(DIA, only for electronics blocks which can be diagnosed)

– Load voltage monitoring (L1+, L2+, L3+, L4+, only for digital elec-

tronics blocks (24 V DC) with output channels)

– Status of the inputs or outputs (for digital electronics blocks only)

Labeling strips are inserted in the electronics block. Fill in the labeling

strips to ensure unambiguous assignment of name, channel and LED.

Definition

Characteristics

System Overview

2-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Technical Description

This chapter contains information on:

In Section you will find on Page

2.1 Design of the Terminal Block 2-2

2.2 Design of the Electronics Block 2-4

In this Chapter

2-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

2.1 Design of the Terminal Block

All digital terminal blocks are built on the same design principle explained

below using the TB1/DC terminal block as a typical example:

45678

Figure 2-1 The TB1/DC

1Coding slide switch

2Fuse

3STOP/RUN switch (not TB6/AC). The power supply for logic circuits

in the electronics block can be switched on or off with the STOP/RUN

switch. It can also be used to switch the ET 200B distributed I/O station

on and off.

4Terminals for power supplies

5Terminals for inputs/outputs

6Slide for removing the terminal block from the standard sectional rail

7M4 screw (connects chassis to PE)

8M5 screw for connecting PE

9PROFIBUS-DP interface

10 Switch for setting the station number (the station number is valid only

after operation of the STOP/RUN switch (STOP –> RUN)).

Design Principle of

the Digital TBs

Technical Description

2-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

On the front of the TB8 analog terminal block, there are an additional 5 cod-

ing switches:

4568

Figure 2-2 The TB8

1Coding slide switch

2Fuse

3STOP/RUN switch. The power supply for logic circuits in the electron-

ics block can be switched on or off with the STOP/RUN switch. It can

also be used to switch the ET 200B distributed I/O station on and off.

4Terminals for power supplies

5Terminals for inputs/outputs

6Slide for removing the terminal block from the standard sectional rail

7Coding connectors. You use the coding connectors to set the wiring of

the TB8 for analog value processing.

8M5 screw for connecting PE

9PROFIBUS-DP interface

10 Switch for setting the station number (the station number is valid only

after operation of the STOP/RUN switch (STOP –> RUN)).

Design Principle of

the TB8 Analog

Block

Technical Description

2-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

2.2 Design of the Electronics Block

All types of electronics block are built on the same design principle which is

explained below using the ET 200B-16DI electronics block as a typical ex-

ample:

234

Figure 2-3 ET 200B-16DI Electronics Block

1Ventilation slots

2Screws for mounting the electronics block on the terminal block

3Printed schematic diagram

4Indication of the coding slide switch setting on the top of the terminal

block

5Labeling strip; for indicating the status of the inputs or outputs in the

case of digital electronics blocks with LEDs

6LEDs for

Voltage supply to the logic circuits (RUN)

Bus fault (BF)

Group diagnostics; short-circuit, wire break or load voltage failure

(DIA, only for electronics blocks which can be diagnosed)

Load voltage monitor (L1+, L2+, L3+, L4+, depending on the elec-

tronics block: see Section 5.2)

The electronics blocks are coded by the manufacturer.

Some types of electronics blocks have a recess at the bottom. This recess

ensures that the terminal block is assigned safely to the correct electronics

block.

Design Principle

Coding

Technical Description

3-1
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
This chapter contains information on:
In Section you will find on Page
3.1 Installing and Setting the Terminal Block 3-2
3.2 Installing the Electronics Block 3-12
3.3 Dismantling the Terminal Block and Electronics Block 3-14
3.4 Electrical Installation 3-16
3.5 Wiring the Terminal Block 3-22
3.6 Wiring the Bus Interface 3-26
You will find a detailed description of the technical data of the ET 200B
modules in Sections 6, 7 and 8.
In the Chapter
Technical Data
3

3-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.1 Installing and Setting the Terminal Block

You can install the terminal block either

on a standard sectional rail (35 15 mm or 35 7.5 mm to

DIN EN 50022)

on smooth surfaces, i.e. direct wall mounting (for dimensions of the

mounting holes see Dimensional Drawings in Sections 7 and 8).

Figure 3-1 shows the clearances required for installation of the 16DI, 16DO,

8DI/8DO, 8DI/8DO HWA, 8RO and 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO electronics blocks

(without shield connecting element):

For swiveling/disengaging the electronics block

Handling and heat dissipation

Figure 3-1 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI, 16DO, 8DI/8DO, 8DI/8DO HWA, 8RO and 4/8AI,

4AI, 4AO Electronics Blocks (without Shield Connecting Element)

Two Methods

Small Electronics

Block, Digital

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure 3-2 shows the clearances required for installation of the 16DI-AC,

16DO-AC, 32DI, 16DO/2A, 32DO, 16DI/16DO, 24DI/8DO, 16RO-AC and

8DI/8RO-AC electronics blocks:

For swiveling/disengaging the electronics block

Handling and heat dissipation

Figure 3-2 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI-AC, 16DO-AC, 32DI, 16DO/2A, 32DO, 16DI/16DO,

24DI/8DO, 16RO-AC and 8DI/8RO-AC Electronics Blocks

Large Electronics

Block

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure 3-3 shows the clearances required for installation of the 4/8AI, 4AI,

4AO electronics blocks (with shield connecting element):

For swiveling/disengaging the electronics block

Handling and heat dissipation

Figure 3-3 Clearances Required for Installation of the 4/8AI, 4AI and 4AO Electronics Blocks (with Shield

Connecting Element)

Small Electronics

Block, Analog

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In the case of analog value processing, we recommend that the cable shield-

ing of the signal lines be connected directly at terminal block TB8.

For this application, you can hang the TB8 onto a shield connecting element

after first mounting the shield connecting element on a standard sectional rail

(35 15 or 35 7.5 mm to DIN EN 50022) or a smooth surface.

To secure the shield braiding, install metal terminal elements on the shield

connecting element.

You can order the shield connecting element and the terminal elements under

the following numbers:

Shield connecting element → Order No. 6ES7 193-0CD40-7XA0

Terminal elements (set of two):

– Single version → Order No. 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0

(one shield cable per terminal element with a diameter of 3 to 8 mm to

be clamped)

– Double version → Order No. 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0

(two shield cables per terminal element with a diameter of 2 to 6 mm

to be clamped)

Note

If you mount the TB8 with shield connecting element on a standard sectional

rail, you must install the ET 200B horizontally.

Shield Connecting

Element for TB8

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

To mount the terminal block on a standard sectional rail...

1. Hang the terminal block on the standard sectional rail (1) and

2. Swing it back until the slide on the module snaps into place (2).

Note:

The meanings of the coding switch settings are explained in Table 3-1.

Figure 3-4 Hanging the Terminal Block on the Standard Sectional Rail and Setting the

Coding Slide Switch

Mounting on a

Standard Sectional

Rail

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

To mount the shield connecting element on a standard sectional rail...

1. Hang the shield connecting element on the standard sectional rail from

below (1) and swing it back (2).

2. Secure the shield connecting element on the standard sectional rail by

tightening the screws (3).

Figure 3-5 Mounting the Shield Connecting Element on the Standard Sectional Rail

Mounting the

Shield Connecting

Element on a Stan-

dard Sectional Rail

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

To mount the terminal block on the shield connecting element ...

1. Engage the terminal block in the brackets of the terminal connecting ele-

ment (1).

2. Tighten the screws to secure the terminal block to the shield connecting

element (2).

Figure 3-6 Mounting the Terminal Block on the Shield Connecting Element

Mounting the Ter-

minal Block on the

Shield Connecting

Element

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In order to prevent the wrong electronics block being plugged in, the terminal

block has a coding slide switch (see Section 2.1, Figure 2-1, 1).

The coding switch can be engaged in 6 settings. Each setting is assigned to a

module class of the ET 200B distributed I/O station:

Table 3-1 Assignment of the Electronics Blocks to the Coding Slide Switch

Setting Module Class

124 V digital modules

224 V special modules

3Analog modules

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6230 V digital modules

Any station number from 00 to 99 can be set with the aid of a tool such as a

screwdriver (see Section 2.1, Figure 2-1, 10):

Station numbers 3 to 99 are permissible when operating with the

IM308-B master interface.

Station numbers 1 to 99 are permissible when operating with the

IM 308-C master interface or with the S7/M7 DP master.

The station number becomes valid only after a STOP/RUN transition of the

ET 200B slave station.

The coding plus of the TB8 provide the means of setting the defaults for ana-

log value measurement and analog value output for each channel in the case

of analog modules (see Section 2-1, Figure 2-2, 7).

The coding plugs enable you to set the input or output circuitry of the TB8 to

suit the measured value sensor or load connected and the desired measuring

or output method.

The possible settings for the coding plugs are: ”A”, ”B”, ”C” and ”D”.

The relationships between the various settings of the coding plugs and the

measurement/output method and the measured value sensors and loads are

detailed in the sections dealing with the individual electronics blocks (see

Sections 8.4 through 8.6). The procedure for changing the settings of the cod-

ing plugs is described below.

Setting the Coding

Slide Switch

Setting the Station

Number

Setting the Coding

Plug

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The procedure for changing the setting of a coding plug is as follows:

1. Pull the coding plug above the channel group from its socket in the TB8

(1).

Tip:

It is easiest to reset the coding plugs before installing the electronics

block.

2. Turn the coding plug to the appropriate position (2) and reinsert the cod-

ing plug in its socket (3).

Correct setting:

The pointer ”∆” beside the letter ”A”, ”B”, ”C” or ”D” must point toward

the electronics block.

Figure 3-7 Changing the Setting of the Coding Plug

Changing the Cod-

ing Plug Setting

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-11

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The fuse (F1) in the terminal block protects against:

short-circuit in the sensor supply

reversed polarity of the voltage supply to the internal logic

voltage spikes in the voltage supply to the internal logic

If the fuse trips the module’s internal logic is deenergized.

Proceed as follows when changing the fuse:

1. Switch the STOP/RUN switch to the “STOP” position.

2. Pull the electronics block off the terminal block.

3. Pry the fuse out of its base using a screwdriver.

4. Insert the new fuse.

5. Reinstall the electronics block on the terminal block.

6. Switch the RUN/STOP switch to “RUN”.

Note

The TB6/AC terminal block has no STOP/RUN switch. Make sure that the

external power supply is switched off before removing the electronics block

and changing the fuse.

Install only the fuses listed in Table 3-2. The fuses can be ordered in packs of

ten.

Table 3-2 Approved Fuses for Terminal Blocks

Terminal

Block Fuse Order No.

(pack of 10)

TB6/AC Miniature fuse TR5-T 1.0; 250 V AC 6ES7 193-0DC00-0XA0

TB1/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 1.6; 250 V 6ES7 193-0DA00-0XA0

TB1-4/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 1.6; 250 V

TB3/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 1.6; 250 V

TB8-analog Miniature fuse TR5-T 1.6; 250 V

TB2/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 2.5; 250 V 6ES7 193-0DB00-0XA0

TB2-4/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 2.5; 250 V

TB4/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 2.5; 250 V

TB4M/DC Miniature fuse TR5-T 2.5; 250 V

Terminal Block

Fuses

Changing the Fuse

Approved Fuses

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-12 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.2 Installing the Electronics Block

After coding the terminal block via the coding slide switch, you can engage

the electronics block on the terminal block:

!Warning

Avoid electrical destruction of the electronics block.

Always set the STOP/RUN switch of the terminal block to the “STOP” posi-

tion before engaging the electronics block on the terminal block!

The TB6/DC terminal block has no STOP/RUN switch. Always switch off

the external power supply before attempting to engage an electronics block

(120/230 V AC) onto the TB6/DC.

1. Engage the electronics block on the terminal block (1).

2. Press the electronics block onto the terminal block (2).

3. Secure the electronics block by tightening the screws (3).

Figure 3-8 Engaging the Electronics Block on the Terminal Block

Engaging the Elec-

tronics Block on

the Terminal Block

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-13

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

A labeling strip is inserted in the electronics block.

Individual DIN A4 sheets consisting of several labeling strips can be ordered

separately. Please refer to Appendix F for order numbers.

Versions

For electronics blocks with 16DI, 16DO, 8DI/8DO, 8DI/8DO HWA, 8RO,

4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO:

10 labeling strips on one DIN A4 sheet

For electronics blocks with 16DI-AC, 16DO-AC, 32DI, 16DO/2A, 32DO,

16DI/16DO, 24DI/8DO, 16RO-AC, 8DI/8RO-AC:

7 large labeling strips and 9 small labeling strips on one DIN A4 sheet.

Labeling the Elec-

tronics Block

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-14 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.3 DismantlingtheTerminalBlockandtheElectronicsBlock

Proceed according to the following steps:

1. Remove the electronics block in the reverse sequence to that described in

Figure 3-8.

!Warning

Avoid electrical destruction of the electronics block.

Always set the STOP/RUN switch of the terminal block to the “STOP” posi-

tion before disengaging the electronics block from the terminal block or

installing a replacement electronics block!

The TB6/DC terminal block has no STOP/RUN switch. Always switch off

the external power supply before attempting to disengage an electronics

block (120/230 V AC) from the TB6/DC or installing a replacement elec-

tronics block.

2. Press the slide (1) on the bottom of the terminal block down using a

screwdriver and

3. Swing the terminal block out of the standard sectional rail (2).

Figure 3-9 Dismantling the ET 200B

Dismantling

(from the Standard

Sectional Rail)

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-15

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Proceed according to the following steps:

1. Remove the electronics block in the reverse sequence to that described in

Figure 3-8.

!Warning

Avoid electrical destruction of the electronics block.

Always set the STOP/RUN switch of the terminal block to the “STOP” posi-

tion before disengaging the electronics block from the terminal block or

installing a replacement electronics block!

The TB6/DC terminal block has no STOP/RUN switch. Always switch off

the external power supply before attempting to disengage an electronics

block (120/230 V AC) from the TB6/DC or installing a replacement elec-

tronics block.

2. Remove the terminal block and the shield connecting element in the re-

verse sequence to that described in Figures 3-5 and 3-6.

Dismantling

(from the Shield

Connecting Ele-

ment)

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-16 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.4 Electrical Installation

The ET 200B distributed I/O station allows both grounded and ungrounded

configurations.

The following two sections explain the configuration rules and give circuit

examples for

In Section you will find on Page

3.4.1 Grounded Configuration 3-17

3.4.2 Ungrounded Configuration 3-20

The numbers in the text cross-reference the components shown in the figures.

Introduction

Next Sections

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-17

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.4.1 Grounded Configuration

In a grounded configuration, the reference potential of the ET 200B logic

circuits and the protective ground conductor (PE) are galvanically intercon-

nected.

You must note the following points for a grounded configuration:

You must provide a main switch (1) in accordance with DIN VDE 0100

for the ET 200B modules, the signal sensors and the actuators.

If the spur lines are a maximum of 3 m long and are ground-fault-resistant

and short-circuit-proof, the supply connection for the ET 200B and the

load circuit requires no additional fuse (2).

Use a Siemens load power supply unit (3) in the 6EV1 series

(Catalog ET 1) for supplying the 24 V DC to the ET 200B.

If you connect another load power supply unit (24 V DC), please note that

the voltage must be in the range 20 to 30 V (including ripple). The load

power supply unit must generate a functional low voltage with safe elec-

trical isolation in accordance with DIN VDE 0106. In the case of non-sta-

bilized load power supply units, you require a back-up capacitor (rating

200 F per 1 A load current).

Provide a detachable connection to the protective ground conductor (4) in

the secondary circuit of the load power supply unit (M terminal).

A fuse (5) is required for fusing the supply voltage.

For both grounded and ungrounded configurations, the PE terminal of

the ET 200B must have a low-impedance connection to the protective

ground conductor or the cabinet ground (machine parts) (6).

Use a minimum cross-section of 4 mm2 and a maximum of 10 mm2 for

equipotential bonding and ground connections.

All machine parts must be grounded.

The PROFIBUS-DP interface of terminal blocks release 2 and later is

ungrounded.

Definition

Rules

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-18 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

For a grounded configuration, you must also do the following at the digital

terminal blocks:

1. Connect the PE terminal to the lower screw.

2. Tighten the upper screw. The upper screw connects the ground potential

to PE.

Figure 3-10 Both Screws Tightened in a Grounded Configuration

The following figure shows the grounded configuration for 24 V DC digital

modules of the ET 200B:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

I/O

ML+

Sensor/

actuator

ML+

(6)

ML+

ET 200B

Figure 3-11 Grounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the ET 200B

Connecting the

Reference Poten-

tial of the Logic

Circuits to PE

Electrical Configu-

ration

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-19

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following figure shows the grounded configuration for 120/230 V AC

digital modules of the ET 200B:

(1)

(5)

I/O

Sensor/

actuator

(6)

ET 200B

(2)

(8)

230 V AC

Figure 3-12 Grounded Configuration for 120/230 V AC Digital Modules of

the ET 200B

Electrical Configu-

ration

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-20 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.4.2 Ungrounded Configuration

In an ungrounded configuration, there is no galvanic connection between the

reference potential of the ET 200B logic circuits and the protective ground

conductor (PE).

You must note the following points for an ungrounded configuration:

You must provide a main switch (1) in accordance with DIN VDE 0100

for the ET 200B modules, the signal sensors and the actuators.

If the spur lines are a maximum of 3 m long and are ground-fault-resistant

and short-circuit-proof, the supply connection for the ET 200B and the

load circuit requires no additional fuse (2).

Use a Siemens load power supply unit (3) in the 6EV1 series

(Catalog ET 1) for supplying the 24 V DC to the ET 200B.

If you connect another load power supply unit (24 V DC), please note that

the voltage must be in the range 20 to 30 V (including ripple). The load

power supply unit must generate a functional low voltage with safe elec-

trical isolation in accordance with DIN VDE 0106. In the case of non-sta-

bilized load power supply units, you require a back-up capacitor (rating

200 F per 1 A load current).

A fuse (5) is required for fusing the supply voltage.

For both grounded and ungrounded configurations, the PE terminal of

the ET 200B must have a low-impedance connection to the protective

ground conductor or the cabinet ground (machine parts) (core cross-sec-

tion of PE min. 4 mm2 and max. 10 mm2) (6).

Provide an insulation monitoring circuit against ground with voltage li-

mitation in accordance with the regulations applying to the system, for

example DIN VDE 0160 (7).

The PROFIBUS-DP interface of terminal blocks release 2 and later is

ungrounded.

!Warning

The ungrounded configuration can be canceled out by grounded machine

parts and grounded electrical equipment.

Example: A grounded sensor or a grounded actuator connects the PE to the

reference potential (M terminal) of the controller.

Definition

Rules

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-21

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

For an ungrounded configuration, you must also do the following at the digi-

tal terminal blocks:

1. Connect the PE terminal to the lower screw.

2. Remove the upper screw for an ungrounded configuration.

Re-

moved

Figure 3-13 Upper Screw Removed in an Ungrounded Configuration

Figure 3-14 shows the ungrounded configuration for 24 V DC digital mod-

ules of the ET 200B:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(7)

(5)

I/O

ML+

Sensor/

actuator

ML+

(6)

ET 200B

ML+

> VCM

Figure 3-14 Ungrounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the

ET 200B

Disconnecting the

Reference Poten-

tial of the Logic

Circuits from PE

Electrical Configu-

ration

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-22 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.5 Wiring the Terminal Block

Connect the following to the terminal block:

Supply voltage for internal logic circuits

Sensor supply for input channels

Load voltage supply for output channels

Sensors/loads

The wiring of the terminal block is dependent on the electronics block used.

A distinction is made between floating and non-floating electronics blocks.

In a floating electronics block

either the circuit for the internal electronics and the load circuit are gal-

vanically isolated from each other:

All 120/230 V AC electronics blocks and floating 24 V DC electronics

blocks belong to this category.

or the voltage supply of the internal logic and the analog circuits are gal-

vanically isolated from each other:

All analog electronics blocks belong to this category.

Note

You can use floating electronics blocks regardless of whether the reference

potential of the supply voltage for the internal logic circuits is grounded or

not.

In non-floating electronics blocks, the internal logic circuits and the load cur-

rent circuit share a common reference potential (M ground).

Non-floating electronics blocks include: non-floating 24 V DC electronics

blocks.

Introduction

Wiring

Floating Electron-

ics Block

Non-Floating Elec-

tronics Blocks

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-23

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The approved conductor cross-sections for all voltage-supply and signal lines

are as follows:

Table 3-3 Approved Conductor Cross-sections

Line Conductor Ferrules Conductor Cross-section

Supply-voltage and sig-

nal lines

with ferrules max. 1.5 mm2

nal lines w/o ferrules max. 2.5 mm2

(min. 0.08 mm2 for TB3, TB4,

TB4M, TB8 and min. 0.14 mm2

for TB1, TB1-4, TB2, TB2-4)

Protective earth (PE) to

terminal block*with ferrule max. 2.5 mm2

*for TB1-4/DC or TB2-4/DC only

Some terminal blocks are fitted with screw terminals while others have

spring-latch terminals (see Figure 3-15) for securing the cable conductors.

Figure 3-15 Connecting Cables to Spring-Latch Terminals

Conductor Cross-

sections

Connections

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-24 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In Chapter 7 “Range of Modules”, you will find the pin assignments of each

electronics block. The following table will help you.

Table 3-4 Pin Assignments of the Terminal Blocks

Assignment of ... For Electronics Block ... See ...

TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC and

TB3/DC

ET 200B-16DI Table 7-3

TB3/DC ET 200B-16DO Table 7-5

ET 200B-8DI/8DO Table 7-9

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA Table 7-10

ET 200B-8RO Table 7-8

TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC,

TB4/DC and TB4M/DC

ET 200B-16DO/2A Table 7-6

TB4/DC and TB4M/DC ET 200B-32DI,

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms Table 7-4

ET 200B-32DO Table 7-7

ET 200B-16DI/16DO Table 7-12

ET 200B-24DI/8DO,

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms Table 7-13

TB6/AC ET 200B-16DI-AC Table 7-14

ET 200B-16DO-AC Table 7-15

ET 200B-16RO-AC Table 7-16

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC Table 7-17

TB8-analog ET 200B-4/8AI Table 8-37

ET 200B-4AI Table 8-55

ET 200B-4AO Table 8-65

Pin Assignments

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-25

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

For analog value processing, connect the cable shields of the signal lines di-

rectly at the TB8 to the shield connecting element (Order No.:

6ES7 193-0CD40-7XA0).

Follow the steps listed below:

1. Engage the TB8 terminal block on the shield connecting element after

first mounting the shield connecting element on the standard sectional rail

or a smooth surface (wall) (see Section 3.1).

2. Mount the metallic terminal elements (see Section 3.1) on the bottom

edge of the shield connecting element (1 and 2).

3. Strip the ends of the signal lines.

4. Secure the bare cable ends to the terminal elements (3 and 4).

5. Connect the shield connecting element to the protective ground conductor

(PE). The cross-section of PE must be a minimum of 4 mm2 and a maxi-

mum of 10 mm2.

6. Connect the shield of the bus cable in such a way that the maximum bend

radius when bent once (10 x dO; dO = outer diameter of the cable) is not

exceeded.

–0031

Figure 3-16 Shield Connecting Element on Terminal Block TB8

Shielding for Ana-

log Value Proces-

sing

Procedure for Con-

necting the Shield-

ing

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-26 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

3.6 Wiring the Bus Interface

The PROFIBUS-DP bus connects to the terminal block by means of a bus

connector.

There are a number of bus connectors for ET 200B.

Table 3-5 Bus Connectors

Design Order Number

max. 12 Mbaud without programmer

socket 6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA01

with programmer socket 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA01

max. 1.5 Mbaud

(without terminating resistor) without programmer

socket 6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

1When inserted, the installation height for the ET 200B module is not exceeded with this

bus connector.

The pin assignment of the 9-pin PROFIBUS-DP interface of the terminal

block is described below.

Table 3-6 Pin Assignment of the PROFIBUS-DP Interface

View2Pin No. Signal Name Designation

1 – –

2 – –

93 RxD/TxD-P Data line B

84RTS Request To Send

75 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)

6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)

17 – –

8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

9 – –

2Terminal block as viewed from in front

Bus Interface

Bus Connector

PROFIBUS-DP In-

terface

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-27

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The procedure for connecting the bus cable to the bus connector is described

in detail in the following manuals:

Manual ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Manual S7-300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation

Manual M7-300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation

Manual S7-400/M7-400 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installa-

tion

Chapters 7 and 8 contain dimensional drawings of ET 200B modules with

bus connectors installed.

Connecting the

Bus Cable

Dimensional Draw-

ings with Bus Con-

nectors

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

3-28 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Mechanical and Electrical Installatio

4-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Configuration and Parameterization

Before startup, you must configure and parameterize the modules of the

ET 200B distributed I/O station.

This chapter contains information on:

In Section you will find on Page

4.1 Configuration Options 4-2

4.2 Requirements for Configuration 4-3

4.3 Where to Find the Requisite Information? 4-5

In this Chapter

4-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

4.1 Configuration Options

You can configure and parameterize the ET 200B modules described in this

manual as DP slaves:

with COM ET 200 version 4.x or higher

– version 4.0 or higher: digital modules

– version 4.1 or higher: analog modules

with COM ET 200 Windows version 1.0 or higher

with STEP 7 version x.0 or higher

– version 2.0 or higher: digital modules

– version 3.0 or higher: analog modules

directly by means of configuration and parameterization telegrams (for

DP masters from Siemens that do not belong to the SIMATIC S5/S7/M7

automation system and other-vendor DP masters).

Theanalog modules of ET200B can be operated as S7 slaves in conjunction

with SIMATIC S7/ M7 and STEP 7 (V3.0 and higher). This means that all the

functions of the central S7 I/O modules are also at your disposal for the

ET 200B analog modules.

Options

S7 Slave

Configuration and Parameterization

4-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

4.2 Requirements for Configuration

COM ET 200 V4.x, COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 require a type file

for each ET 200B module (DP slave). The type file is a record of all the

properties of the module concerned.

You do not need a type file to operate ET 200B analog modules as S7 slaves.

Before you start working with the software, check that the type file of the

ET 200B module is installed in a type-file directory recognized by the soft-

ware. The names of the type files are listed in Appendix A.1.

If you do not have a type file for ET 200B, you can fetch the type file you

need via modem. The number to dial is +49 (911) 737972.

You do not need a device master data file (GSD file) unless you are going to

use ET 200B with a DP master that cannot process the type file. The GSD

file contains all the slave-specific properties.

The format of the GSD file is defined in EN 50170, Part 3. The contents of

the GSD files are described in Appendix A.2.

You can order the GSD file on diskette (Order No. 6ES7 190-1AA00-0AA0)

or fetch it via modem. The modem number to dial is +49 (911) 737972.

Type File

GSD File

Configuration and Parameterization

4-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

There are a number of type file versions for the ET 200B modules; the ver-

sion you need depends on the parameterization software and the master.

The type file version is indicated by the seventh character in the type file

name (example: SIxxxxAD.200), ”xxxx” is the module’s manufacturer ID.

The 8th character in the type file name indicates the language:

D = German, E = English, F = French, I = Italian, S = Spanish,

X = non-language-specific (example: SIxxxxAE.200 for an English type

file).

The type file versions and their applications are listed in the table below.

Table 4-1 Type File Versions and Applications

Parameterization

software COM ET 200

V4.x COM ET 200 Windows

(V1.0 and higher) STEP 71

(as DP slave)

Master IM 308-B IM 308-C S7/M7 DP master

ET 200B digital modules

Type file2SIxxxxTE.200 SIxxxxAE.200 or

SIxxxxAX.200 SIxxxxAE.200 or

SIxxxxAX.200

Parameterization no settings possible

Configuration DP ID DP ID DP ID

Diagnostics 13 bytes 13 bytes 13 bytes

ET 200B analog modules

Type file2SIxxxxTE.200 SIxxxxAE.200 SIxxxxBE.200 SIxxxxBE.200

Parameterization 32 bytes

(KH format) 32 bytes

(plain text with pick

list)

36 bytes3

(plain text with pick

list)

36 bytes3

(plain text with pick

list)

Configuration DP ID DP ID extended DP ID,

single-channel ad-

dressing possible

extended DP ID,

single-channel ad-

dressing possible

Diagnostics 16 bytes 21/25 bytes 25/29 bytes 25/29 bytes

These applications are taken into account in Chapters 5 through 8; important information on the other applications

is contained in the Appendix.

1STEP 7 version 2.0 and higher for digital modules, STEP 7 version 3.0 and higher for analog modules

2xxxx = manufacturer ID of the ET 200B module (see Section A.1)

3Analog modules with additional functions: limit-value alarm, diagnostics alarm, 4AO supporting dummy-value out-

put, other measuring ranges

Which Type File?

Configuration and Parameterization

4-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

4.3 Where to Find the Requisite Information?

Chapters 5 through 8 contain information on configuration, parameterization

and diagnostics that you will need if you are working with the latest type files

under COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 (see Table 4-1: gray fields).

If you use COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 to configure and parameterize

ET 200B modules, the graphical user interfaces and the integral online help

systems of these programs provide additional support.

The manual ET200 Distributed I/O System (Order No. 6ES5 998-3ES12) con-

tains general information on working with COM ET 200 Windows.

Basic information on configuring and parameterizing distributed I/O with

STEP 7 is contained in the user manual entitled Standard Software for S7 and

M7, STEP 7.

If you configure and parameterize ET 200B analog modules with

COM ET 200 Windows and the type file SIxxxxAE.200, you will find the

requisite supplementary information in Appendix E of this manual.

If you configure and parameterize ET 200B modules with COM ET 200 ver-

sion 4.x, you will find the information you need in Appendix D of this

manual.

If you use configuration and parameterization telegrams to operate ET 200B,

e.g. CP 5431 as DP master, you need the details of the layout of the configu-

ration and parameterization telegram, which is module-specific (see Appen-

dix B and C).

COM ET 200 Win-

dows and STEP 7

COM ET 200 Win-

dows (Old Type

File)

COM ET 200 Ver-

sion 4.x

Configuration and

Parameterization

Configuration and Parameterization

4-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Configuration and Parameterization

5-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Status and Error Diagnostics

This chapter describes the diagnostics options for the ET 200B distributed

I/O station.

The information is applicable if you are using the latest applicable type file

under COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 (see Table 4-1: gray fields).

In Section you will find on Page

5.1 Possible response on startup 5-2

5.2 Status and error indication by LEDs 5-3

5.3 Slave diagnostics 5-5

Diagnostics with the IM 308-B master interface and COM ET 200 V4.x is not

discussed in this chapter. You will find all the information you need on diag-

nostics with the IM 308-B in Appendix D.

If you configure the analog modules of ET 200B with COM ET 200 Win-

dows and the type file SIxxxxAE.200, you will find the information you need

on diagnostics in Appendix E.

In this Chapter

Diagnostics with

IM 308-B

Diagnostics with

IM 308-C (Old Type

Files)

5-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.1 Possible Response on Startup

If power is switched on and off repeatedly, it is possible in exceptional cases

that an ET 200B digital module will not be accepted by the PROFIBUS-DP

bus.

Remedy:

Set the STOP/RUN switch to STOP and then back to RUN.

With the ET 200B digital modules, it is not possible to correct a wrong con-

figuration and simultaneously change the baud rate. If this is attempted, the

station will not be accepted by the PROFIBUS-DP bus.

Remedy:

Set the STOP/RUN switch to STOP and then back to RUN.

Response to

Power Off/Power

Baud Rate Change

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.2 Status and Error Indication by LEDs

The indicators on the front panels of the ET 200B provide initial indication

of the type of error.

The meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs on digital ET 200B mod-

ules are listed in the table below.

Table 5-1 LEDs on Digital ET 200B Modules and their Meanings

LED State Meaning

RUN Lit (green) ET 200B in operation (power supply switched on; STOP/RUN switch in

”RUN” position1

BF Lit (red) Either

Response monitoring time has elapsed without the ET 200B station

being addressed (because connection to the IM 308-C or to the

S7/M7 DP master has failed or the IM 308-C is set to STOP)

The ET 200B station was not parameterized on startup/restart.

DIA Lit (red) For digital 24 V DC output modules:

one output at least: short-circuit or load voltage failure (L1+, L2+,

L3+, L4+)

For analog modules:

diagnostics for at least one input or output

L1+ Lit (green) For ET 200B-16DO, -8DI/8DO, -8DI/8DO HWA, -16DI/16DO,

–24DI/8DO and -24DI/8DO 0.2ms:

Voltage is applied for channel group Q0: .0 ... .7.2

L2+ Lit (green) For ET 200B-16DO, -16DI/16DO:

Voltage is applied for channel group Q1: .0 ... .7.2

L1+/L2+ Lit (green) For ET 200B-32DO:

Voltage is applied for channel groups Q0: .0 ... .7 and Q1: .0 ... .7.2

For ET 200B-16DO/2A:

Voltage is applied for channel groups Q0: .0 ... .3 and Q0: .4 ... .7.2

L3+/L4+ Lit (green) For ET 200B-32DO:

Voltage is applied for channel groups Q2: .0 ... .7 and Q3: .0 ... .7.2

For ET 200B-16DO/2A:

Voltage is applied for channel group Q1: .0 ... .3 and Q1: .4 ... .7.2

1Not applicable to AC 120/230 V AC digital modules. These modules do not have a STOP/RUN switch.

2LED goes out if fuse blows or voltage drops below a certain limit (typically 15.5 V).

Introduction

Error Indication,

Digital ET 200B

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs on analog ET 200B mod-

ules are listed in the table below.

Table 5-2 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings

LED RUN LED BF LED DIA Meaning Remedy

Off Off Off Voltage not applied to mod-

ule.

Check the power supply.

Check that the electronics

block is correctly mounted

on the terminal block.

Lit (green) Off Off Module is on the PROFI-

BUS-DP and is exchanging

data.

Lit (green) Lit (red) or off Lit (red) An error has occurred on the

module (e.g. parameteriza-

tion incorrect, wire break,

measuring range overshot)

Read the diagnostics buffer

to identify the error, see

Section 5.3 ”Slave Diag-

nostics”

If there is no diagnostics in-

formation in the buffer,

check parameterization to

ascertain whether the diag-

nostics alarm and corre-

sponding channel diagnos-

tics have been enabled.

Lit (green) Flashing (red) Off Either

Module has not received

a parameterization tele-

gram, or telegram is in-

correct.

Incorrect bus protocol.

Check the configuration in the

DP master (station number , sta-

tion type).

Lit (green) Flashing (red) Lit (red) Error in configuration tele-

gram This error cannot occur if the

correct type files are used.

Lit (green) Flashes once

(red) Off Module is powering up. -

Lit (green) Lit (red) No signifi-

cance Baud rate matching in prog-

ress.

Check the PROFIBUS-DP

connection.

Check the DP master.

Error Indication,

Analog ET 200B

Status and Error Diagnostics

5
5-5
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
5.3 Slave Diagnostics
Diagnostics means the detection and pinpointing of errors. The layout of
slave diagnostics is defined in standard EN 50170, Part 3. Slave diagnostics
of the ET 200B are in compliance with this standard.
This section describes the structure of slave diagnostics for ET 200B.
In Section you will find on Page
5.3.1 General information on slave diagnostics, operation with
IM 308-C 5-6
5.3.2 General information on slave diagnostics, operation with
S7/M7 DP masters (STEP 7) or other PROFIBUS-DP masters 5-8
5.3.3 Structure of slave diagnostics 5-9
5.3.4 Structure of station status 1 to 3 5-11
5.3.5 Structure of the master station number and the manufacturer
ID 5-13
5.3.6 Structure of device-related diagnostics (digital ET 200B) 5-14
5.3.7 Structure of ID-related diagnostics (analog ET200B) 5-16
5.3.8 Structure of device-related diagnostics (analog ET 200B) 5-18
Section 5.3.3 describes the basic structure of slave diagnostics for digital and
analog ET 200B modules. Sections 5.3.4 to 5.3.8 describe the contents of the
individual diagnostics bytes.
Definition
In this Section
Further Informa-
tion
Status and Error Diagnostics

5-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.1 GeneralInformationonSlaveDiagnostics,OperationwithIM 308-C

To request slave diagnostics for an ET 200B station in operation with

IM 308-C, you must call the FB IM308C function block (FB 192) with the

function FCT = SD.

The FB IM308C places the slave diagnostics in the S5 data area of the CPU

(data block or bit memory address area) opened when the FBIM308C was

called.

FB IM308C handling conforms to general access to diagnostics data of the

IM 308-C and is described in detail in the manual ET200 Distributed I/O Sys-

tem (Order No. 6ES5 998-3ES.2).

The example below shows how to request slave diagnostics with the aid of

the FB IM308C and place the information in a data block.

This is followed by an example illustrating how to evaluate slave diagnostics.

This second example assumes that the diagnostics information has been

placed in a data block.

Note

The module parameters of the FB IM308C and the error codes in the ERR

parameter of the FB IM308C are described in detail in the manual ET 200

Distributed I/O System (Order No. 6ES5 998-3ES.2).

In this example, the FB IM308C (FB 192) is employed to request slave diag-

nostics of a slave having the station number 3. The diagnostics data will be

placed in data block DB 10 as of data word DW 0.

Basic structure of the STEP 5 listing (e.g. in the OB 1):

STL Explanation

:JU FB 192

Name :IM308C

DPAD : KH F800

IMST : KY 0,3

FCT : KC SD

GCGR : KM 00000000 00000000

TYP : KY 0,10

STAD : KF +0

LENG : KF -1

ERR : FW 134

:***

Invoke FB IM308C

DP frame: F800

Number of the IM 308-C: 0, station num-

ber of the slave: 3

SD = Read slave diagnostics

irrelevant

Memory area: 0, block: DB10

Number of the first data word: DW0

Bytes to be transferred: -1(joker

length)

Error word: MW 134

Requesting Slave

Diagnostics

FM IM308C

Example:

Request Diagnos-

tics with

FBIM308C

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The slave diagnostics of a digital ET 200B module have been requested from

the CPU and placed in a data block DB 10 starting at data word DW 0. You

want to evaluate station status 1 and 2.

In the STEP 5 program, you program the following:

STL Explanation

A DB 10

L DW 0

L KH 000C

!=F

BEC

JC FBx

Invoke data block (here: DB 10) Load

diagnostics word ”Station status 1 and

station status 2” (response monitoring

active)

no error?

Evaluate error in FBx.

The analog modules of ET 200B support the following alarms:

Diagnostics alarm

Process alarm

In order to evaluate diagnostics alarms and process alarms via the device-re-

lated diagnostics with the IM 308-C, it is important to bear the following in

mind:

Note

In your STEP5 application program you must regularly query the corre-

sponding bits in the device-related diagnostics in order to ensure that alarms

are not overwritten by subsequent alarms.

With regard to the bus runtime for the PROFIBUS-DP you must allow for

the fact that the bits are queried at least once parallel to the bus runtime.

The structure of slave diagnostics for operation with IM 308-C is described in

Sections 5.3.3 to 5.3.8.

Example:

Evaluating Diag-

nostics

Diagnostics Alarm

and Process Alarm

Structure of Slave

Diagnostics

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.2 General Information on Slave Diagnostics, Operation with

S7/M7 DP Masters (STEP 7) or Other PROFIBUS-DP Masters

If you operate the ET 200B as a DP slave with a SIMATIC S7/M7 DP mas-

ter, the ET 200B modules function like central S7-300 I/O modules.

You read out diagnostics (data records 0 and 1) with SFC 13 ”DPNRM_DG”.

For information on requesting diagnostics data, see the manual STEP

7 Stan-

dard and System Functions.

If you operate ET 200B as DP slave with DP masters from Siemens that do

not belong to the SIMATIC S5/S7/M7 automation system or with other-ven-

dor DP masters, see the documentation on the DP master for information on

how to request slave diagnostics.

The analog modules of ET 200B support the following alarms:

Diagnostics alarm

Process alarm

You can evaluate these alarms with an S7/M7 DP master. In the event of an

alarm, alarm OBs are automatically run in the CPU (see the programming

manual System Software for S7-300/S7-400, Program Design).

Note

If you want to evaluate diagnostics alarms and process alarms via the device-

related diagnostics with other than PROFIBUS-DP masters, you must bear

the following in mind:

The DP master should be able to store the diagnostics messages, i.e. the

diagnostics messages should be placed in a ring buffer in the DP master.

If the DP master cannot store diagnostics messages, only the most re-

cently received diagnostics message will be available.

In your application program you must regularly query the corresponding

bits in the device-related diagnostics. With regard to the bus runtime for

the PROFIBUS-DP you must allow for the fact that the bits are queried at

least once parallel to the bus runtime.

The structure of slave diagnostics for operation with S7/M7 DP masters

(STEP 7) or other PROFIBUS-DP masters is described in Sections 5.3.3 to

5.3.8.

Diagnostics with

S7/M7 DP Masters

Diagnostics with

Other PROFIBUS-

DP Masters

Diagnostic Alarm

and Process Alarm

Structure of Slave

Diagnostics

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics

A certain number of bytes is reserved per slave for slave diagnostics: the pre-

cise number of bytes reserved depends on the station type.

Diagnostics of the ET 200B distributed I/O station is in compliance with

EN 50170, Part 3. The basic structure of slave diagnostics is described below.

The figure below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for digital ET 200B

modules:

Byte 0

Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3 -

PROFIBUS-DP standard

Byte 2

Byte 3 Master station number - PRO-

FIBUS-DP standard

Byte 4

Byte 5 Low byte

High byte Manufacturer ID - PRO-

FIBUS-DP standard

Header (device-related diagnostics)

Byte 6

Byte 7

Bytes 8

to 12

Device-related diagnostics

.Free

Figure 5-1 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B

Introduction

Digital ET 200B

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The figure below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for for analog

ET 200B modules:

Byte 0

Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3 -

PROFIBUS-DP standard

Byte 2

Byte 3 Master station number - PRO-

FIBUS-DP standard

Byte 4

Byte 5 Low byte

High byte Manufacturer ID -

PROFIBUS-DP stan-

dard

Header (ID-related diagnostics)

ID-related diagnostics

Header (device-related diagnostics)

Byte 9

Bytes 9

to 28 Device-related diagnostics

Byte 6

Byte 7

Byte 8

Figure 5-2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B

You can request slave diagnostics with the following function blocks:

Table 5-3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnostics

PLC Family Number Name

SIMATIC S5 with IM 308-C FB 192 FB IM308C

SIMATIC S7/M7 SFC 13 SFC “DPNRM_DG”

Analog ET 200B

Requesting Slave

Diagnostics

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-11

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.4 Structure of Station Status 1 to 3

Station status 1 ... 3 provides an overview of the status of the ET 200B (see

Figures 5-1 and 5-2, bytes 0 to 2).

The table below shows the structure of station status 1:

Table 5-4 Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0)

Bit Meaning

01: DP slave cannot be addressed by DP master.

11: DP slave not yet ready for data exchange.

2 1: Configuration data sent by DP master to DP slave does not match

the structure of the DP slave.

31: Device-related diagnostics data is waiting.

41: Requested function is not supported by DP slave.

5 1: Implausible answer received from DP slave.

61: parameterization telegram is errored.

71: DP slave was parameterized by a DP master not the DP master

which currently has access to the DP slave.

The table below shows the structure of station status 2:

Table 5-5 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1)

Bit Meaning

01: DP slave must be reparameterized.

1 1: A diagnostics message is waiting. The DP slave cannot resume

operation until the error has been rectified (static diagnostics mes-

sage).

2 1: Bit is always ”1” if DP slave having this station number exists.

31: Response monitoring is activated for this slave.

41: DP slave has received a ”FREEZE” control command.1

51: DP slave has received a ”SYNC” control command.1

6 0: Bit is always ”0”.

Introduction

Station Status 1

(Byte 0)

Station Status 2

(Byte 1)

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-12 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 5-5 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1), continued

Bit Meaning

71: DP slave is deactivated, i.e. slave has been removed from current

processing.

1Bit is not updated unless an extra diagnostics message changes.

Station status 3 is reserved and is not relevant as regards diagnostics of the

DP slave. Its value is always 00H.

Station Status 3

(Byte 2)

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-13

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.5 Structure of the Master Station Number and the Manufacturer ID

The ”Master station number” diagnostics byte contains the station number of

the DP master which parameterized the ET 200B. The ”Manufacturer ID”

diagnostics byte describes the type of the ET 200B.

The master station number consists of one byte (see Figures 5-1 and 5-2):

Table 5-6 Structure of the Master Station Number (Byte 3)

Bit Meaning

0 to 7 Station number of the DP master which parameterized the DP

slave and which has read and write access to the DP slave.

The manufacturer ID consists of two bytes (see Figures 5-1 and 5-2):

Table 5-7 Structure of the Manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5)

Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer ID for

00H01HET 200B-16DI 6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0

00H02HET 200B-16DO 6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0

00H03HET 200B-8RO 6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0

00H04HET 200B-32DI 6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0

00H05HET 200B-16DO/2A 6ES7 131-0BH11-0XB0

00H0AHET 200B-16DI/16DO 6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0

00H0BHET 200B-8DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0

00H0CHET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0

00H0DHET 200B-32DO 6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0

00H0EHET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms 6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0

00H0FHET 200B-24DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0

00H10HET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA 6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0

00H19HET 200B-16DI-AC 6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0

00H1AHET 200B-16DO-AC 6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0

00H1CHET 200B-16RO-AC 6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0

00H1DHET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC 6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0

80H18HET 200B-4AO 6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0

80H19HET 200B-4AI 6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0

80H1AHET 200B-4/8AI 6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0

Introduction

Master Station

Number (Byte 3)

Manufacturer ID

(Bytes 4, 5)

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-14 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.6 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Digital ET 200B)

The device-related diagnostics for digital ET 200B modules indicate whether

inputs or outputs are defective. The header indicates the length of the device-

related diagnostics. (see Figure 5-1, bytes 6 and 7)

Note

Device-related diagnostics requires an ET 200B station with diagnostics ca-

pability.

ET 200B stations which do not have diagnostics capability have the value

”07H” in the header and the remaining bytes are reserved.

Digital ET 200B modules have the value 07H in the ”Header (device-related

diagnostics)” byte.

Byte 6 70

Bit No.

Length of device-related diagnostics

incl. byte 6 (= 7 bytes)

Code for device-related diagnostics

00001100 1

Figure 5-3 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics) for Digital ET200B

(Byte 6)

The device-related diagnostics of digital ET 200B modules with diagnostics

capability consists of one byte (see Figure 5-1):

Byte 7 76 0

CG 0: Overload: output short-circuit to M

CG 0: Fuse defective: no load voltage

CG 1: Overload: output short-circuit to M

CG 1: Fuse defective: no load voltage

CG 2: Overload: output short-circuit to M

CG 2: Fuse defective: no load voltage

CG 3: Overload: output short-circuit to M

CG 3: Fuse defective: no load voltage

54321

CG = Channel group

Bit No.

Figure 5-4 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B (Byte 7)

Introduction

Header (Byte 6)

Device-Related

Diagnostics

(Byte 7)

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-15

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Note the following as regards evaluation of device-related diagnostics:

Note

The channel group of an ET 200B digital module always takes up one byte

in the S5 address space of the CPU (corresponding to 8 inputs or 8 outputs),

irrespective of the galvanic isolation of the module (grouping).

Example: ET 200B-16DO/2A (galvanic isolation in groups of 4)

Channel group 0 corresponds to Q0: outputs .0 ... .7.

Potential group 0 corresponds to Q0: outputs .0 ... .3.

Channel Group

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-16 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.7 Structure of ID-related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B)

ID-related diagnostics shows which module in which slot is defective. The

header indicate the length of ID-related diagnostics. (see Figure 5-2, bytes 6

to 8)

Analog ET 200B modules have the value 43H in the ”Header (ID-related

diagnostics)” byte.

Byte 6 70

Bit No.

Length of ID-related diagnostics

incl. byte 6 (= 3 bytes)

Code for ID-related diagnostics

00001101 0

Figure 5-5 Structure of the Header (ID-related Diagnostics) for Analog ET200B

(Byte 6)

The ID-related diagnostics of analog ET 200B modules consists of two bytes

(see Figure 5-2):

Byte 7 70

Module in slot 4 defective (08H)

Bit No.

00100000

Byte 8 70

Bit No.

00000000

Figure 5-6 Structure of ID-related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 7, 8)

Note

Irrespective of the configuration of the analog ET 200B module (slots 4

to 11), slot 4 is always flagged as defective in a diagnostics message!

Introduction

Header (Byte 6)

ID-related Diag-

nostics (Bytes 7, 8)

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-17

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

If a configuration telegram contains an error, only the 3-byte ID-related diag-

nostics (bytes 6, 7, 8) is returned and no device-related diagnostics.

If the configuration telegram contains an error, the structure of ID-related

diagnostics is as follows:

Byte 7 70

Slot 4 defective 8AI, 4AI, 4AO, 1AI, 1AO

Bit No.3 000

Byte 8 70

Bit No.

0000 0

Possible IDs:Message:

Slot 5 defective 1AI, 1AO

Slot 6 defective 1AI, 1AO

Slot 7 defective 1AI, 1AO

Slot 8 defective 1AI

Slot 9 defective 1AI

Possible IDs:Message:

Slot 10 defective 1AI

Slot 11 defective 1AI

654

Figure 5-7 Structure of ID-related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 7, 8) in the

Event of an Error in the Configuration Telegram

Note

If there is an error in the configuration telegram, the configured slots of the

analog ET 200B module the configurations of which are errored are shown.

If the error in the configuration telegram is general (e.g. wrong length), the

value FFH is returned for bytes 7 and 8.

Configuration Er-

ror

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-18 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

5.3.8 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B)

The device-related diagnostics for an analog ET 200B shows you the error

reported by the ET 200B. The header indicates the length of device-related

diagnostics. (see Figure 5-2, bytes 9 to 28)

Note

Chapter 8 contains a discussion of ”Supplementary Bits” in the section deal-

ing with analog value representation: these bits contain additional diagnos-

tics information.

The structure of the device-related diagnostics for configuration of analog

modules with the latest type file version SIxxxxBE.200 is described below. If

you configure with the type file SIxxxxAE.200, please turn to Appendix E.2.

The analog ET 200B modules contain the following information in the

”Header (device-related diagnostics)” byte:

Byte 9 70

Bit No.

Length of device-related diagnostics incl. byte 9

(depending on number of channels used):

Code for device-related diagnostics

000

0DH ... 14H: 4/8AI (13 to 20 bytes)

0DH ... 10H: 4AI, 4AO (13 to 16 bytes)

08H: process alarm for 4/8AI, 4AI

Figure 5-8 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics) for Analog ET200B

(Byte 9)

Introduction

Header (Byte 9)

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-19

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Device-related diagnostics of the analog ET 200B modules comprises a max-

imum of 19 bytes:

Byte 10 01H: Code for diagnostics alarm

02H: Code for process alarm

Diagnostics alarmProcess alarm

Byte 11 Slot of module

with diagnostics (4)

Slot of module with pro-

cess alarm (4)

Byte 12 00H: reserved00H: reserved

Bytes 13 to ...Diagnostics alarm data

(see Tables 5-8 to 5-10)

Process alarm data

(see Table 5-8)

... Byte 28... Byte 16

Figure 5-9 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 10 to

28)

Table 5-8 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 16.

Table 5-8 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics and Process Alarms

Byte Bit Byte 10 = 01H (Diagnostics Alarm) Byte 10 = 02H (Process Alarm)

0Module defect Channel 0 Upper limit value over-

shoot (4/8AI, 4AI) FFH: End-of-

cycle alarm

(4/8AI)

1Internal error Channel 1 Upper limit value over-

shoot (4/8AI1)

(4/8AI)

(³

2External error Channel 2 Upper limit value over-

shoot(4/8AI1,4AI)

(

Tab.

3Channel error Channel 3 Reserved

4 Reserved Channel 4 Reserved

5 Reserved Channel 5 Reserved

6Parameterization missing Channel 6 Reserved

7Incorrect parameters in module Channel 7 Reserved

1For the ET 200B-4/8AI, only the combination of single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0

for resistance measurement (Pt 100, Ni 100, R) entails display of ”Upper/lower limit value overshoot” for channel 1.

In all other cases (i.e. module addressing and single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0 for

other than resistance measurement (Pt 100, Ni 100, R), ”Upper/lower limit value overshoot” is displayed for channel

Device-Related

Diagnostics

Bytes 13 to 16

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-20 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 5-8 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics and Process Alarms, continued

Byte Byte 10 = 02H (Process Alarm)Byte 10 = 01H (Diagnostics Alarm)Bit

Module class 0101 Analog module Channel 0 Lower limit value over-

shoot (4/8AI, 4AI) 00H: Reserved

3Channel 1 Lower limit value over-

shoot (4/8AI1)

Channel 2 Lower limit value over-

shoot(4/8AI1,4AI)

Channel 3 Reserved

4Channel information available Channel 4 Reserved

5 Reserved Channel 5 Reserved

6 Reserved Channel 6 Reserved

7 Reserved Channel 7 Reserved

0Wrong ET 200B station type 00H: Reserved 00H: Reserved

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

0 Reserved 00H: Reserved 00 H: Reserved

1 Reserved

2EPROM error (4AI)

3 Reserved

4ADC/DAC error (4AO)

5 Reserved

6Process alarm lost (4/8AI, 4AI)

7 Reserved

In a diagnostics alarm the possible values of byte 13 are as follows:

Table 5-9 Possible Values for Byte 13 in Diagnostics Alarm

Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning

00H0 0 0 0 No error

03H (83H) 0 0 1 1 Internal error, no channel error;(incorrect parameters in the module)

0BH (8BH) 1 0 1 1 Internal error,channel error;(incorrect parameters in the module)

0DH1 1 0 1 External error, channel error

0FH (8FH) 1 1 1 1 Summation error of all above errors;(incorrect parameters in the module)

Possible Values,

Byte 13

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-21

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 5-10 shows the structure and contents of bytes 17 to 28 (for diagnostics

alarm only).

Table 5-10 Bytes 17 to 28 for Diagnostics Alarm

Byte Bit Meaning Remark

0 to

Channel type 71H

4/8AI, 4AI

4AO

73H4AO

18 0 to

7Number of diagnostics bits output per

channel by a module. 08H4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

19 0 to

7Number of channels of a module. 01H to 04H

01H to 08H

4AI, 4AO

4/8AI

Channel error vector:

0 Channel error, channel 0 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

1Channel error, channel 1 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

2Channel error, channel 2 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

20 3Channel error, channel 3 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

4Channel error, channel 4 4/8AI

5 Channel error, channel 5 4/8AI

6 Channel error, channel 6 4/8AI

7 Channel error, channel 7 4/8AI

21 to 281-Channel-specific errors See Table 5-11

1The number of bytes depends on the number of channels in the module.

Table 5-11 shows the assignment of the diagnostics byte for an analog input

or analog output channel.

Table 5-11 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input/Analog Output Channel

Byte Bit Analog Input Channel (4/8AI,

4AI) Analog Output Channel (4AO)

0Configuration/parameterization error

1Common-mode error (4/8AI only) ”0” (reserved)

2 ”0” (reserved)

y21

3 ”0” (reserved) Ground short-circuit

4Wire-break/feed-current monitoring: meas. transducer/Pt 100/Ni 100/R1

5”0” (reserved) ”0” (reserved)

6Measuring range overshoot ”0” (reserved)

7Measuring range overshoot ”0” (reserved)

1In the case of the ET 200B-4/8AI, a ”wire break” error is superimposed on common-

mode and measuring-range errors occurring at the same time (common-mode and mea-

suring-range errors are not signaled).

Bytes 17 to 28

(Diagnostics

Alarm)

Analog Channel

Status and Error Diagnostics

5-22 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Status and Error Diagnostics

6-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

General Technical Specifications

The general technical specifications comprise the standards that all ET 200B

modules satisfy, the test values they comply with and the criteria used to test

all modules.

The table below contains the general technical specifications of the ET 200B

modules.

Climatic environ. conditions acc. to IEC 1131-2

Operating temperature

Preferred installation

(= horizontal installa-

tion on a vertical wall:

see Figure 3-8)

0 to )60 °C (32 to 140 °F)

Other installation posi-

tions 0 to )40 °C (32 to 104 °F)

(Air intake temperature,

measured at the bottom of

the module)

Storage/transport

temperature *40 to )70 °C

(–40 to 158 °F)

Relative humidity to

DIN 40040 15 to 95 % (indoor), no

condensation

Atmospheric pressure

Operating 795 to 1080 hPa

Storage/transport 660 to 1080 hPa

Pollutants

SO2v 0.5 ppm (rel. humidity

v 60 %, no condensation)

H2Sv 0.1 ppm (rel. humidity

v 60 %, no condensation)

Mechanical environmental conditions

Vibration1 tested to

IEC 68-2-6

10 Hzv f < 57 Hz Const. amplitude

0.075mm

57 Hzv f < 150 Hz Const. acceleration 1g

Mode of vibration Frequency sweeps

with a rate of change of

1 octave/min.

Period of oscillation 10 frequency sweeps per

axis in each of the 3 per-

pendicular axes

Operating conditions In accordance with

IEC 1131-2

Shock1 tested to

IEC 68-2-27

Type of shock Semi-sinusoidal

Strength of shock 15 g peak value,

11 ms duration

Direction of shock 2 shocks in each of the 3

perpendicular axes

Drop and topple to

IEC 68-2-31

Tested with Height of fall 100 mm

(3.90 in.)

1V ibrations and shocks permanently reaching the speci-

fied values as well as bumps must be prevented by ade-

quate measures.

What are General

Technical Specifi-

cations?

General Technical

Specifications

6-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)/noise immu-

nity

Static electricity to

IEC 801-2 Discharge to all parts that

are accessible to the opera-

tor during normal opera-

tion

Test voltage 8 kV air discharge

4 kV contact discharge

(relative humidity 30 to

95%)

Electromagnetic fields to

IEC 801-3 Field strength 10 V/m

Fast transient burst to

IEC 801-4, Class III

Digital input/output

module

for V = 24 V

for V > 24 V 2 kV

2 kV

Analog input/output

module 2 kV

Communications inter-

face 2 kV

IEC/VDE safety information

Degree of protection to

IEC 529

Type IP 20

Class I to IEC 536

Insulation rating

Between electrically

independent circuits

and circuits connected

to a central grounding

point

to DIN VDE 0160

(05.1988) and

IEC 1131-2

Between all circuits

and central grounding

point (standard sec-

tional rail)

to DIN VDE 0160

(05.1988) and

IEC 1131-2

Test voltage for a nominal

voltage Vinput of the cir-

cuits (AC/DC)

Vinput = 0 to 50 V

Vinput = 50 to 125 V

Vinput = 125 to 250 V

to DIN VDE 0160 and

IEC 1131-2

500 V DC

1250 V AC

1500 V AC

Radio interference sup-

pression to VDE 0871

Limit class A

General Technical Specifications

6-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

ET 200B is certified as follows:

UL Recognition Mark

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to

Standard UL 508, Report 116536

CSA Certification Mark

Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to

Standard C 22.2 No. 142, Report LR 48323

The AC 120/230 V digital modules of ET 200B are FM-certified as follows:

FM Certification to Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611,

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D.

!Warning

Risk of injury and damage to property.

In hazardous locations injury and damage to property can occur if you dis-

connect connections while an ET 200 is in operation.

In hazardous locations, always deenergize the ET 200 before disconnecting

connections.

!Warning

WARNING - DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE

UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS

Our products satisfy the requirements of EU Directive 89/336/EC ”Electro-

magnetic Compatibility” and the harmonized European standards (EN stan-

dards) cited therein.

In accordance with Article 10 of the above-mentioned EU Directive, the EU

declarations of conformity are available for scrutiny by the authorities re-

sponsible by:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Bereich Automatisierungstechnik

AUT E 148

Postfach 1963

D-92209 Amberg

UL/CSA Certifica-

tion

FM Certification

CE certification

General Technical Specifications

6-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

SIMATIC products are designed for use in an industrial environment.

With a special permit, SIMATIC products can also be used in a residential

environment (residential, office and trade environments, small businesses).

You must obtain the special permit from the appropriate authority or testing

agency. In Germany, these special permits are issued by the Bundesamt für

Post und Telekommunikation and its regional offices.

Area of Application Requirement for

Interference

Emission Interference

Immunity

Industry EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995

Residential Special permit EN 50082-1 : 1992

SIMATIC products satisfy the requirements if you comply with the guidelines

for installation and operation as laid down in the manuals.

The ET 200B distributed I/O station is an environmentally compatible prod-

uct.

The following are some of the characteristics of ET 200B:

The plastic used for the housing has high fire resistance deriving from

halogen-free flame resistance

Laser labeling (i.e. no externally applied labels)

Plastics bear identification markings to DIN 54840

Compact design so materials outlay is low, number of components is

minimized by integration in ASICs

On account of the low pollutant make-up, ET 200B is suitable for recycling.

For environmentally compatible recycling and disposal of your old SIMATIC

equipment, please contact:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Technische Dienstleistungen

ANL A 44 Kreislaufwirtschaft

Postfach 32 40

D-D-91052 Erlangen

Phone: + 49 91 31/7-3 33 19

Fax: + 49 91 31/7-2 66 43

This Siemens office of fers comprehensive and flexible disposal backed by

individual consulting at fixed prices. Once the equipment has been disposed

of you receive disassembly records stating the material fractions and the cor-

responding identification records for the materials.

Area of Applica-

tion

Compliance with

Installation Guide-

lines

Recycling and Dis-

posal

General Technical Specifications

7-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Digital Modules

There are a number of digital modules for connecting sensors/transducers or

actuators/loads.

This chapter contains the technical data, the dimensional drawings and the

block diagrams for the ET 200B digital modules.

In Section you will find on Page

7.1 Digital Modules 7-2

7.2 Terminal Blocks 7-4

7.3 Electronics Blocks 7-14

Introduction

In this Chapter

7-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.1 Digital Modules

The tables below provide an overview of the digital modules of ET 200B.

The following types of digital electronics block are available:

Table 7-1 ET 200B Digital Electronics Blocks

Electronics block Description

ET 200B-16DI Inputs: 16 DC 24 V (3 ms)

ET 200B-32DI Inputs: 32 DC 24 V (3 ms)

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms Inputs: 32 DC 24 V (0.2 ms)

ET 200B-16DO Outputs: 16 DC 24 V (0.5 A/2 A)

ET 200B-16DO/2A Outputs: 16 DC 24 V (2 A)

ET 200B-32DO Outputs: 32 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-8DI/8DO Inputs: 8 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA Inputs: 8 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)/HW shutdown

ET 200B-16DI/16DO Inputs: 16 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 16 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET200B-24DI/8DO Inputs: 24 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms Inputs: 24 DC 24 V (0.2 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-8RO Outputs: 8 REL. DC 24 ... 60 V

ET 200B-16DI-AC Inputs: 16 AC 120/230 V

ET 200B-16DO-AC Outputs: 16 AC 120/230 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-16RO-AC Outputs: 16 REL.AC 120 V/DC 24 ... 150 V

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC Inputs: 8 AC 120/230 V

Outputs: 8 REL.AC 120 V/DC 24 ... 150 V

Introduction

List of Electronics

Blocks

Digital Modules

7-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following types of digital terminal blocks are available:

Table 7-2 ET 200B Digital Terminal Blocks

Terminal block Description

TB1/DC 16-channel, screw-type terminal, 3-tier

TB1-4/DC 16-channel, screw-type terminal, 4-tier

TB2/DC 32-channel, screw-type terminal, 3-tier

TB2-4/DC 32-channel, screw-type terminal, 4-tier

TB3/DC 16-channel, spring-latch terminal

TB4/DC 32-channel, spring-latch terminal

TB4M/DC 32-channel, spring-latch terminal with extra row of ter-

minals for additional grounds

TB6/AC 16-channel, screw-type terminal, 3-tier

List of Terminal

Blocks

Digital Modules

7
7-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
7.2 Terminal Blocks
This section contains the dimensional drawings and the terminal numbering
of the ET 200B terminal blocks
The last subsection shows the dimensions of an ET 200B station with bus
connector inserted.
The pin assignment of the terminal blocks depends on which electronics
block is installed and is therefore described in the section dealing with elec-
tronics blocks, Section 7.3.
In Section you will find on Page
7.2.1 Terminal block TB1/DC (6ES7 193-0CA10-0XA0) 7-5
7.2.2 Terminal block TB1-4/DC (6ES7 193-0CA20-0XA0) 7-6
7.2.3 Terminal block TB3/DC (6ES7 193-0CA30-0XA0) 7-7
7.2.4 Terminal block TB2/DC (6ES7 193-0CB10-0XA0) 7-8
7.2.5 Terminal block TB2-4/DC (6ES7 193-0CB20-0XA0) 7-9
7.2.6 Terminal block TB4/DC (6ES7 193-0CB30-0XA0) 7-10
7.2.7 Terminal block TB4M/DC (6ES7 193-0CE30-0XA0) 7-11
7.2.8 Terminal block TB6/AC (6ES7 193-0CC10-0XA0) 7-12
7.2.9 Terminal block and bus connector 7-13
Introduction
Pin Assignment
In this Section
Digital Modules

7-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.1 Terminal Block TB1/DC (6ES7 193-0CA10-0XA0)

Figure 7-1 is a dimensional drawing of the TB1/DC (screw-type terminal,

3-tier).

Figure 7-1 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB1/DC (Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier)

Figure 7-2 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB1/DC (screw-type terminal, 3-tier).

Figure 7-2 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB1/DC (Screw-Type Terminal,

3-Tier)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.2 Terminal Block TB1-4/DC (6ES7 193-0CA20-0XA0)

Figure 7-3 is a dimensional drawing of the TB1-4/DC (screw-type terminal,

4-tier).

Figure 7-3 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB1-4/DC (Screw-Type Terminal, 4-Tier)

Figure 7-4 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB1-4/DC (screw-type terminal, 4-tier).

Figure 7-4 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB1-4/DC (Screw-Type

Terminal,4-Tier)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.3 Terminal Block TB3/DC (6ES7 193-0CA30-0XA0)

Figure 7-5 is a dimensional drawing of the TB3/DC (spring-latch terminal).

Holes for Attachment

Figure 7-5 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB3/DC (Spring-Latch Terminal)

Figure 7-6 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB3/DC (spring-latch terminal).

Figure 7-6 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB3/DC (Spring-Latch Terminal)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.4 Terminal Block TB2/DC (6ES7 193-0CB10-0XA0)

Figure 7-7 is a dimensional drawing of the TB2/DC (screw-type terminal,

3-tier).

Figure 7-7 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB2/DC (Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier)

Figure 7-8 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB2/DC (screw-type terminal, 3-tier).

Figure 7-8 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB2/DC (Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.5 Terminal Block TB2-4/DC (6ES7 193-0CB20-0XA0)

Figure 7-9 is a dimensional drawing of the TB2-4/DC (screw-type terminal,

4-tier).

Figure 7-9 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB2-4/DC (Screw-Type Terminal, 4-Tier)

Figure 7-10 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB2-4/DC (screw-type terminal, 4-tier).

Figure 7-10 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB2-4/DC (Screw-Type Terminal, 4-Tier)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.6 Terminal Block TB4/DC (6ES7 193-0CB30-0XA0)

Figure 7-11 is a dimensional drawing of the TB4/DC (spring-latch terminal).

Figure 7-11 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB4/DC (Spring-Latch Terminal)

Figure 7-12 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB4/DC (spring-latch terminal).

Figure 7-12 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB4/DC (Spring-Latch Terminal)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-11

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.7 Terminal Block TB4M/DC (6ES7 193-0CE30-0XA0)

Figure 7-13 is a dimensional drawing of the TB4M/DC (spring-latch termi-

nal).

Figure 7-13 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB4M/DC (Spring-Latch Terminal)

Figure 7-14 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB4M/DC (spring-latch terminal).

Figure 7-14 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB4M/DC (Spring-Latch Terminal)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-12 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.8 Terminal Block TB6/AC (6ES7 193-0CC10-0XA0)

Figure 7-15 is a dimensional drawing of the TB6/AC (screw-type terminal,

3-tier)

Figure 7-15 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB6/AC (Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier)

Figure 7-16 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

TB6/AC (screw-type terminal, 3-tier).

Figure 7-16 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB6/AC (Screw-Type Terminal, 3-Tier)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-13

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.2.9 Terminal Block and Bus Connector

Figure 7-17 shows the dimensional drawings (side elevation) of any terminal

block with electronics block inserted and a variety of bus connectors.

6ES7 972-0BA10-0XB0 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XB0

Figure 7-17 Dimensional Drawing: Side Elevation with Bus Connector (6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 and

6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7
7-14 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
7.3 Electronics Blocks
This section contains the technical data of the electronics blocks of ET 200B.
The technical data for each electronics block is accompanied by
an outline of the characteristics,
the block diagram and
the pin assignments for the various permissible terminal blocks.
In Section you will find on Page
7.3.1 ET 200B-16DI (6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0) 7-15
7.3.2 ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and
ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms (6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0) 7-20
7.3.3 ET 200B-16DO (6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0) 7-26
7.3.4 ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0) 7-32
7.3.5 ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0) 7-38
7.3.6 ET 200B-8RO (6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0) 7-44
7.3.7 ET 200B-8DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0) 7-49
7.3.8 ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7  133-0BH10-0XB0) 7-55
7.3.9 ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0) 7-62
7.3.10 ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0) and
ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms (6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0) 7-68
7.3.11 ET 200B-16DI-AC (6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0) 7-74
7.3.12 ET 200B-16DO-AC (6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0) 7-79
7.3.13 ET 200B-16RO-AC (6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0) 7-84
7.3.14 ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC (6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0) 7-89
Introduction
In this Section
Digital Modules

7-15

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.1 Electronics Block ET 200B-16DI (6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0)

The ET 200B 16DI electronics block has the following characteristics

16 inputs, non-floating

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Suitable for switches and 2/3-wire proximity switches (BEROs).

Possible terminal blocks: TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC, TB3/DC

Dimensional drawing for ET 200B-16DI:

Figure 7-18 Dimensional Drawing: ET 200B-16DI (6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0)

Figure 7-19 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

ET 200B-16DI.

Figure 7-19 Connection Diagram: ET 200B-16DI (6ES7 131 0BH00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-16 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B-16DI and TB1/DC or

TB3/DC:

L3+ M

24 V

supply

Input

Ground

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-16DI

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1/DC or

TB3/DC

L2+L1+

Voltage sensor

Digital

inputs

PROFIBUS-DP

L3+ M

5 V

24 V

5 V

24 V

L3+

I0: 0...7, I1:0...7

+–

16x

Logic

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

switch

Figure 7-20 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DI (6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0) and TB1/DC or TB3/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-17

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DI and TB1-4/DC:

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-16DI

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1-4/DC

PROFIBUS-DP

L3+ M

5 V

24 V

5 V

24 V

L3+

I0: 0...7, I1:0...7

+–

16x

Logic

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP L3+ M

24 V

supply

Input

Digital

inputs

Voltage sensor

Ground

L2+

L1+

Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-21 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DI (6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0) and TB1-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-18 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16DI. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB1-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-3 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC for ET 200B-16DI

(6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering

TB1-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1I0: Input .0 17 24 V (sensor voltage,

internally jumpered

33 Ground (sensor volt-

age internally jump

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2I0: Input .1 18

nterna

umpere

connected to L3+) 34 age,

nterna

ump-

ered, connected to M1, ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

3I0: Input .2 19

)

M2, M3)

)

4I0: Input .3 20 36

5 I0: Input .4 21 37

6 I0: Input .5 22 38

7 I0: Input .6 23 39

8 I0: Input .7 24 40

9 I1: Input .0 25 41

10 I1: Input .1 26 42

11 I1: Input .2 27 43

12 I1: Input .3 28 44

13 I1: Input .4 29 45

14 I1: Input .5 30 46

15 I1: Input .6 31 47

16 I1: Input .7 32 48

– L1+ not used M1 not used PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

– L2+ not used M2 not used ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

– L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage 24 V

M3 Ground connection,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage

)

– L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage 24 V

M3 Ground connection,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage

1 TB1-4/DC only

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-19

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16DI:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB1-4/DC.

L3+ and terminals 17 ... 32 are interconnected, as are M1, M2, M3 and

terminals 33 ... 48.

The two L3+ terminals are also interconnected.

The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 (1.6 A) in the terminal blocks.

Nevertheless, make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in

the technical data for the electronics block.

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16DI is listed in the tables

below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE capability Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP Yes

Power losses Typ. 2.5 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 600 g (21 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W H D) 160 130 60 mm

(6.24 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SI-

NEC L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Status of inputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for inputs, sensor supply and internal

logic

Supply voltage (L3+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L3+

Logic Typ. 70 mA

Sensors Max. 500 mA

I2t (for inrush current) v 0.05 A2s

Inputs

Number of inputs 16

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

For “0” signal – 30 V to 5 V

For “1” signal 13 V to 30 V

Input current for “1” sig-

nal Typ. 4 mA at 24 V

Min. 2 mA

Delay of inputs 2.0 to 3.5 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO Possible

Quiescent current v 1.5 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Possible

W ire lengths of the sensors

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Important Note on

Wiring

Fuse

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-20 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.2 Electronics Blocks ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms (6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0)

The ET 200B-32DI and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms electronics blocks have the

following characteristics:

32 inputs, non-floating

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Input delay:

6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0³3 ms

6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0 ³0.2 ms

Suitable for switches and 2/3-wire proximity switches (BEROs).

Possible terminal blocks: TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC, TB4M/DC

Dimensional drawing for ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms (6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0):

Figure 7-22 Dimensional Drawing: ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms

(6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0)

Figure 7-23 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

ET 200B-32DI.

Figure 7-23 Connection Diagram: ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms

(6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Terminal Number-

ing

Digital Modules

7-21

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B-32DI or

ET 200B-32DI 0.2 ms and TB2/DC or TB4/DC:

PROFIBUS-DP

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

Screw for ground-

ing (see Sec. 3.4)

5 V

Logic

Out.

Ground

24 V

5 V

24 V

ET 200B-32DI

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB2/DC or

TB4/DC

+–

32x

I0: 0...7

I1: 0...7

I2: 0...7

I3: 0...7

Digital

inputs

Voltage sensor

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

switch

Figure 7-24 Block Diagram: ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) or ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms

(6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0) and TB2/DC or TB4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-22 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-32DI or ET 200B-32DI

0.2 ms and TB2-4/DC:

PROFIBUS-DP

L5+ M5

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

ET 200B-32DI

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB2-4/DC

+–

32x

I0: 0...7

I1: 0...7

I2: 0...7

I3: 0...7

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

Out.

Ground

Digital

inputs

Voltage

sensor

Screw for grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-25 Block Diagram: ET 200B-32DI (6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) or ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms

(6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0) and TB2-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-23

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-32DI and ET 200B-32DI 0.2 ms. For the sake of clarity, the table

also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the

TB2-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-4 Pin AssignmentofTerminal BlocksTB2/DC,TB2-4/DC,TB4/DCandTB4M/DCforET 200B-32DI

(6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms (6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB2-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1I0: Input .0 33 24 V (sensor voltage,

internally jumpered

65 Ground (sensor volt-

age internally jump

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2I0: Input .1 34

nterna

umpere

connected to L5+) 66 age,

nterna

ump-

ered, connected to ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

3I0: Input .2 35

connected to L5+)

ered, connected to

M5)

nected to PE screw)

4 I0: Input .3 36 68

5 I0: Input .4 37 69

6 I0: Input .5 38 70

7 I0: Input .6 39 71

8 I0: Input .7 40 72

9 I1: Input .0 41 73

10 I1: Input .1 42 74

11 I1: Input .2 43 75

12 I1: Input .3 44 76

13 I1: Input .4 45 77

14 I1: Input .5 46 78

15 I1: Input .6 47 79

16 I1: Input .7 48 80

17 I2: Input .0 49 81

18 I2: Input .1 50 82

19 I2: Input .2 51 83

20 I2: Input .3 52 84

21 I2: Input .4 53 85

22 I2: Input .5 54 86

23 I2: Input .6 55 87

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-24 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-4 Pin AssignmentofTerminal BlocksTB2/DC,TB2-4/DC,TB4/DCandTB4M/DCforET 200B-32DI

(6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0) and ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms (6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 41

Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

24 I2: Input .7 56 24 V (sensor voltage,

internally jumpered

88 Ground (sensor volt-

age internally jump

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

25 I3: Input .0 57

nterna

umpere

connected to L5+) 89 age,

nterna

ump-

ered, connected to ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

26 I3: Input .1 58

)

ered, connected to

M5)

nected to PE screw)

27 I3: Input .2 59 91

28 I3: Input .3 60 92

29 I3: Input .4 61 93

30 I3: Input .5 62 94

31 I3: Input .6 63 95

32 I3: Input .7 64 96

– L5+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and

sensor voltage 24 V

M5 Ground connection,

internal logic and

sensor voltage

PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

– L5+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and

sensor voltage 24 V

M5 Ground connection,

internal logic and

sensor voltage

1TB2-4/DC only; in the TB4M/DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections (see Section 7.2.7)

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the ET 200B-32DI

and ET 200B-32DI 0.2 ms:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB2-4/DC.

L5+ and terminals 33 ... 64 are interconnected, as are M5 and terminals

65 ... 96.

The two L5+ terminals are also internally interconnected.

The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 (2.5 A) in the terminal blocks.

Nevertheless, make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in

the technical data for the electronics block.

Important Note on

Wiring

Fuse

Digital Modules

7-25

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics blocks ET 200B-32DI and ET 200B-32DI

0.2 ms is listed in the tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates*

for

6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0

and

6ES7 131-0BL00-0BL0

9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol

for

6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0

and

6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0

FREEZE

capability

for

6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0

and

6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0

PROFIBUS-DP

Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP Yes

Power losses Typ. 4.8 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 800 g (28 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SI-

NEC L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Status of inputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for inputs, sensor supply and internal

logic

Supply logic (L5+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L5+

Logic Typ. 70 mA

Sensors Max. 1 A

I2t

(for inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Inputs

Number of inputs 32

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

For “0” signal – 30 V to 5 V

For “1” signal 13 V to 30 V

Input current for

“1” signal Typ. 4 mA for 24 V

Min. 2 mA

Delay of inputs for

6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0 3 ms

Delay of inputs for

6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0 0.2 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO Possible

Quiescent current v 1.5 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Possible

Cable length of sensors

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-26 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.3 Electronics Block ET 200B-16DO (6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0)

The ET 200B-16DO electronics block has the following characteristics:

16 outputs, non-floating

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Output current: 12 0.5 A, 4 2 A

Suitable for solenoid valves and DC contactors.

Possible terminal blocks: TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC, TB3/DC

See Figure 7-18 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-26 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DO (6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-27

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B-16DO and TB1/DC or

TB3/DC:

L3+ M

24 V

supply

Digital

outputs

Out.

Supply

Ground

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-16DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1/DC or

TB3/DC

L3+ M

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

Q1: 0...7

L2+L1+Q0: 0...7

L2+L1+

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-27 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DO (6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0) and TB1/DC or TB3/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-28 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DO and TB1-4/DC:

Supply

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-16DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1-4/DC

L3+ M

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

Q1: 0...7

L2+L1+Q0: 0...7

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

24 V

supply

Digital

outputs

L2+L1+ L3+ M

Out.

Ground

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-28 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DO (6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0) and TB1-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-29

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16DO. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB1-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-5 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC for ET 200B-16DO

(6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0)

Terminal numbering

TB1-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0* 17 not used (internally

jumpered)

33 Ground (internally

jumpered connected

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2Q0: Output .1* 18

umpere

)34

umpere

, connecte

to M1, M2, M3) ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

3Q0: Output .2 19 35

,,)

)

4 Q0: Output .3 20 36

5 Q0: Output .4 21 37

6 Q0: Output .5 22 38

7 Q0: Output .6 23 39

8 Q0: Output .7 24 40

9Q1: Output .0* 25 41

10 Q1: Output .1* 26 42

11 Q1: Output .2 27 43

12 Q1: Output .3 28 44

13 Q1: Output .4 29 45

14 Q1: Output .5 30 46

15 Q1: Output .6 31 47

16 Q1: Output .7 32 48

– L1+ Voltage supply L1+

for channel group Q0:

.0 to .7

M1 Ground supply M1 for

channel group Q0:

.0 to .7

PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

– L2+ Voltage supply L2+

for channel group Q1:

.0 to .7

M2 Ground supply M2 for

channel group Q1:

.0 to .7

* The maximum load for these outputs is 2A, the maximum load for all other outputs is 0.5 A.

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-30 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-5 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC for ET 200B-16DO

(6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 41

Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

– L3+ Voltage supply, inter-

nal logic M3 Ground connection,

internal logic PE (internally jump-

ered but not connected

tPE )

– L3+ Voltage supply, inter-

nal logic M3 Ground connection,

internal logic

to PE screw)

1 TB1-4/DC only

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16DO:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB1-4/DC.

L1+, L2+ and L3+ are not interconnected.

M1, M2, M3 and terminals 33 ... 48 are internally interconnected.

The two L3+ terminals are internally interconnected.

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-31

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16DO is listed in the tables

below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC capability Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 5 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 600 g (21 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60 mm

(6.24 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SI-

NEC L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA ”LED

Load voltage monitoring,

by group Green “L1+”, “L2+” LEDs

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for outputs, load voltage supply and

internal logic

Supply voltages

(L1+,L2+,L3+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L3+

Logic 80 mA

I2t (for inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Short-circuit protection in

case of polarity reversal

(L1+ and L2+) of load

voltage

Outputs

Number of outputs 16

Galvanic isolation No

In groups of 8

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 2 A (2 outputs per

group; .0 and .1)

Max. 0.5 A (6 outputs per

group; .2 to .7)

Delay of outputs Max. 1 ms

At max. lamp load Max. 80 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 100 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Load current per group

Total current Max. 4 A

In case of short-circuit Max. 6.5 A

Lamp load

At I = 0.5 A Max. 5 W

At I = 2 A Max. 10 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on current interrup-

tion

Typ. (L1+, L2+) –55 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-32 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.4 Electronics Block ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0)

The ET 200B-16DO/2A electronics block has the following characteristics:

16 outputs, floating in groups of 4

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Output current: 2 A

Possible terminal blocks: TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC, TB4M/DC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-29 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-33

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B-16DO/2A and TB2/DC or

TB4/DC:

L5+ M5L1+ Q0:

0...3 L2+ M2M1 Q0:

4...7 L3+ M3 Q1:

0...3 L4+ M4

4x 4x 4x 4x

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

Digital

outputs

5 V

Logic

Out.

Supply

Ground

24 V

5 V

24 V

Q1:

4...7

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

L1+M1

Suppr.

logic

L2+M2 L3+M3 L4+M4

ET 200B-16DO/2A

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB2/DC or

TB4/DC

Suppr.

logic Suppr.

logic

Screw for ground-

ing (see Sec. 3.4)

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

switch

Figure 7-30 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0) and TB2/DC or TB4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-34 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DO/2A and TB2/DC

or TB4/DC:

L5+ M5L1+ Q0:

0...3 L2+ M2M1 Q0:

4...7 L3+ M3 Q1:

0...3 L4+ M4

4x 4x 4x 4x

L5+ M5

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

Q1:

4...7

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

L1+M1

Suppr.

logic

L2+M2 L3+M3 L4+M4

ET 200B-16DO/2A

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB2-4/DC

Suppr.

logic Suppr.

logic

Screw for grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

24 V

supply

Digital

outputs

Out.

Ground

M5 Supply

switch

Figure 7-31 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0) and TB2-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-35

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16DO/2A. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB2-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-6 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC; TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC and TB4M/DC for

ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB2-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0 33 Voltage supply L1+

for channel group

65 Ground M1 for chan-

nel group Q0: 0 to 3

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2not used 34 for channel group

0: .0 to .3 66 nel group Q0: .0 to .3

(

internall

ered

)

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw

)

3Q0: Output .1 35

Q0:

(internally jumpered) 67

(internally

jumpered)

nected

screw)

4not used 36 68

5Q0: Output .2 37 69

6not used 38 70

7Q0: Output .3 39 71

8not used 40 72

9Q0: Output .4 41 Voltage supply L2+

for channel group

73 Ground M2 for chan-

nel group Q0: 4 to 7

10 not used 42 for channel group

0: .4 to .7 74 nel group Q0: .4 to .7

(

internall

ered

)

11 Q0: Output .5 43

Q0:

(internally jumpered) 75

(internally

jumpered)

12 not used 44 76

13 Q0: Output .6 45 77

14 not used 46 78

15 Q0: Output .7 47 79

16 not used 48 80

17 Q1: Output .0 49 Voltage supply L3+

for channel group

81 Ground M3 for chan-

nel group Q1: 0 to 3

18 not used 50 for channel group

1: .0 to .3 82 nel group Q1: .0 to .3

(

internall

ered

)

19 Q1: Output .1 51

Q1:

(internally jumpered) 83

(internally

jumpered)

20 not used 52 84

21 Q1: Output .2 53 85

22 not used 54 86

23 Q1: Output .3 55 87

24 not used 56 88

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-36 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-6 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC; TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC and TB4M/DC for

ET 200B-16DO/2A (6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 41

Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

25 Q1: Output .4 57 Voltage supply L4+

for channel group

89 Ground M4 for chan-

nel group Q1: 4 to 7

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

26 not used 58 for channel group

1: .4 to .7 90 nel group Q1: .4 to .7

(

internall

ered

)

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw

)

27 Q1: Output .5 59

Q1:

(internally jumpered) 91

(internally

jumpered)

nected

screw)

28 not used 60 92

29 Q1: Output .6 61 93

30 not used 62 94

31 Q1: Output .7 63 95

32 not used 64 96

– L5+ Voltage supply, inter-

nal logic M5 Ground connection,

internal logic PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

dPE )

– L5+ Voltage supply, inter-

nal logic M5 Ground connection,

internal logic

nected to PE screw)

1TB2-4/DC only; in the TB4M/DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections (see Section 7.2.7)

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16DO/2A:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB2-4/DC.

L1+ ... L5+ and M1 ... M5 are not internally interconnected.

The two L5+ terminals are internally interconnected.

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-37

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16DO/2A is listed in the

tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC capability Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 7 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 900 g (31.5 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA” LED

Load voltage monitoring,

by channel group

(QO, Q1)

Green LEDs

“L1+”/“L2+” (QO: .0 to 7)

“L3+”/“L4+” (Q1: .0 to 7)

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for outputs, load voltage supply and

internal logic

Supply voltage

(L1+,L2+,L3+,L4+,L5+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value at t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L5+

Logic 100 mA

I2t

(for inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Short-circuit protection in

case of polarity reversal

(L1+,L2+,L3+,L4+) of

load voltage

Outputs

Number of outputs 16

Galvanic isolation Yes

In groups of 4

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 2 A

Delay of outputs Max. 1 ms

At max. lamp load Max. 80 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 100 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Load current per group

Total current Max. 4 A

In case of short-circuit Max. 6.5 A

Lamp load Max. 10 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limit of inductive cutoff

voltage Typ. (L1+ ... L4+) – 50 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-38 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.5 Electronics Block ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0)

The ET 200B-32DO electronics block has the following characteristics:

32 outputs, floating in groups of 8

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Output voltage: 0.5 A

Suitable for solenoid valves and DC contactors

Possible terminal blocks: TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC, TB4M/DC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-32 Front Elevation: ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-39

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B-32DO and TB2/DC or

TB4/DC:

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

Digital

outputs

Out.

Supply

Ground

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

L1+M1 L2+M2 L3+M3 L4+M4

ET 200B-32DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB2/DC or

TB4/DC

L5+ M5L1+ Q0:

0...7 L2+ M2M1 Q1:

0...7 L3+ M3 Q2:

0...7 L4+ M4

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

Q3:

0...7

Driver

8x 8x 8x

Driver Driver Driver

Suppr.

logic Suppr.

logic

Screw for ground-

ing (see Sec. 3.4)

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

switch

Figure 7-33 Block Diagram: ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0) and TB2/DC or TB4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-40 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-32DO and TB2-4/DC:

L5+ M5

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

L1+M1 L2+M2 L3+M3 L4+M4

ET 200B-32DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB2-4/DC

L5+ M5L1+ Q0:

0...7 L2+ M2M1 Q1:

0...7 L3+ M3 Q2:

0...7 L4+ M4

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

Q3:

0...7

Driver

8x 8x 8x

Driver Driver Driver

Suppr.

logic Suppr.

logic

Screw for ground-

ing (see Sec. 3.4)

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

24 V

supply

Digital

outputs

Out.

Supply

Ground

switch

Figure 7-34 Block Diagram: ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0) and TB2-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-41

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-32DO. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB2-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-7 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC and TB4M/DC for

ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB2-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0 33 Voltage supply L1+

for channel group

65 Ground M1 for chan-

nel group Q0: 0 to 7

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2Q0: Output .1 34 for channel group

0: .0 to .7 66 nel group Q0: .0 to .7

(

internall

ered

)

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw

)

3Q0: Output .2 35

Q0:

(internally jumpered) 67

(internally

jumpered)

nected

screw)

4Q0: Output .3 36 68

5 Q0: Output .4 37 69

6 Q0: Output .5 38 70

7 Q0: Output .6 39 71

8 Q0: Output .7 40 72

9 Q1: Output .0 41 Voltage supply L2+

for channel group

73 Ground M2 for chan-

nel group Q01: 0 to

10 Q1: Output .1 42 for channel group

1: .4 to .7 74 nel group Q01: .0 to

11 Q1: Output .2 43

Q1:

(internally jumpered) 75 .

(internally jumpered)

12 Q1: Output .3 44 76

13 Q1: Output .4 45 77

14 Q1: Output .5 46 78

15 Q1: Output .6 47 79

16 Q1: Output .7 48 80

17 Q2: Output .0 49 Voltage supply L3+

for channel group

81 Ground M3 for chan-

nel group Q2: 0 to 7

18 Q2: Output .1 50 for channel group

2: .0 to .7 82 nel group Q2: .0 to .7

(

internall

ered

)

19 Q2: Output .2 51

Q2:

(internally jumpered) 83

(internally

jumpered)

20 Q2: Output .3 52 84

21 Q2: Output .4 53 85

22 Q2: Output .5 54 86

23 Q2: Output .6 55 87

24 Q2: Output .7 56 88

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-42 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-7 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC and TB4M/DC for

ET 200B-32DO (6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 41

Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

25 Q3: Output .0 57 Voltage supply L4+

for channel group

89 Ground M4 for chan-

nel group Q3: 0 to 7

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

26 Q3: Output .1 58 for channel group

3: .0 to .7 90 nel group Q3: .0 to .7

(

internall

ered

)

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw

)

27 Q3: Output .2 59

Q3:

(internally jumpered) 91

(internally

jumpered)

nected

screw)

28 Q3: Output .3 60 92

29 Q3: Output .4 61 93

30 Q3: Output .5 62 94

31 Q3: Output .6 63 95

32 Q3: Output .7 64 96

– L5+ Voltage supply, inter-

nal logic M5 Ground connection,

internal logic PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

dPE )

– L5+ Voltage supply, inter-

nal logic M5 Ground connection,

internal logic

nected to PE screw)

1TB2-4/DC only; in the TB4M/DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections (see Section 7.2.7)

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-32DO:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB2-4/DC.

If all actuators are connected by two-wire cables to the TB2/DC, TB4/DC

or TB2-4/DC, connect the ground of an actuator and the supply for the

reference potential per group by means of a DIN 46231 cable cleat.

L1+ ... L5+ and M1 ... M5 are not internally interconnected.

The two L5+ terminals are internally interconnected.

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-43

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-32DO is listed in the tables

below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC capability Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 7.9 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 800 g (28 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN ”LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA” LED

Load voltage monitoring Green “L1+/L2+”,

“L3+/L4+” LEDs

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for outputs, load voltage supply and

internal logic

Supply voltage

(L1+,L2+,L3+,L4+,L5+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

I2t

(for inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Current consumption from

L5+

Logic Typ. 75 mA

Outputs

Number of outputs 32

Galvanic isolation Yes

In groups of 8

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output current

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 0.5 A

Delay of outputs

From “0” to “1” Approx. 20 ms

From “1” to “0” Max. 0.5 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 1000 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Short-circuit protection Yes

Load current per group

Total current Max. 2 A

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on current interrup-

tion

Typ. (L1+ ... L4+) – 55 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-44 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.6 Electronics block ET 200B-8RO (6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0)

The ET 200B-8RO electronics block has the following characteristics:

8 relay outputs, floating in groups of 1

Switching voltage: 24 to 60 V DC

Possible terminal blocks: TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC or TB3/DC

See Figure 7-18 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-35 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8RO (6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-45

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-8RO and TB1/DC or

TB3/DC:

L3+ M

24 V

supply

Relay

outputs

Contact

Ground

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-8RO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1/DC or

TB3/DC

L2+L1+

L3+ M

5 V

24 V

5 V

24 V

Logic

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

X/0 X/1

switch

Figure 7-36 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8RO (6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0) and TB1/DC or TB3/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-46 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-8RO and TB1-4/DC:

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-8RO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1-4/DC

L3+ M

5 V

24 V

5 V

24 V

Logic

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

X/0 X/1

24 V

supply

Relay

outputs

Contact L2+L1+ L3+ M

Ground

switch

Figure 7-37 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8RO (6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0) and TB1-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-47

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-8RO. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal num-

bering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB1-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-8 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC for ET 200B-8RO

(6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering

TB1-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Connection 0/0 17 not used (internally

jumpered)

33 Ground (internally

jumpered connected

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2 Q0: Connection 0/1 18

umpere

)34

umpere

, connecte

to M1, M2, M3) ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

3Q0: Connection 1/0 19 35

,,)

)

4 Q0: Connection 1/1 20 36

5 Q0: Connection 2/0 21 37

6 Q0: Connection 2/1 22 38

7 Q0: Connection 3/0 23 39

8 Q0: Connection 3/1 24 40

9 Q0: Connection 4/0 25 41

10 Q0: Connection 4/1 26 42

11 Q0: Connection 5/0 27 43

12 Q0: Connection 5/1 28 44

13 Q0: Connection 6/0 29 45

14 Q0: Connection 6/1 30 46

15 Q0: Connection 7/0 31 47

16 Q0: Connection 7/1 32 48

– L1+ not used M1 not used PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

– L2+ not used M2 not used ere

ut not con-

nected to PE screw)

– L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic M3 Ground connection,

internal logic

)

– L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic M3 Ground connection,

internal logic

1TB1-4/DC only

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-48 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-8RO:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB1-4/DC.

M1, M2, M3 and terminals 33 ... 48 are interconnected.

The two L3+ terminals are internally interconnected.

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-8RO is listed in the tables

below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC capability Yes

Galvanic isolation to the

SINEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Typ. 2 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 650 g (22.75 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60 mm

(6.24 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for relay outputs and internal logic

Supply voltage (L3+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L3+

Logic Typ. 130 mA

I2t (for inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Relay outputs

Number of outputs 8

Galvanic isolation Yes

In groups of 1

Short-circuit protection No

Continuous current Ith Max. 5 A

Relay type Dold OW 5699

Cycling capacity of con-

tacts

Resistive load Max. 2 A at 24 V DC

Max. 1.5 A at 48 V DC

Max. 1 A at 60 V DC

Inductive load Max. 0.5 A at 30 V DC

Mechanical service life > 108 switching operations

Switching rate Max. 20/s

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

Setting of a digital input Possible

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Important Note on

Wiring

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-49

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.7 Electronics Block ET 200B-8DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0)

The ET 200B-8DI/8DO electronics block has the following characteristics:

8 inputs, non-floating

8 outputs, non-floating

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Input delay: 3 ms

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Possible terminal blocks: TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC or TB3/DC

See Figure 7-18 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-38 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-50 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B-8DI/8DO and TB1/DC or

TB3/DC:

L3+ M

24 V

supply

I/O

Ground

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-8DI/8DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1/DC or

TB3/DC

L1+

L3+M

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

I0: 0...7 L1+Q0: 0...7

+–

Driver

Voltage

sensor

Outputs Inputs

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-39 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0) and TB1/DC or TB3/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-51

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-8DI/8DO and

TB1-4/DC:

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-8DI/8DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1-4/DC

L3+M

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

I0: 0...7 L1+Q0: 0...7

+–

Driver

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

24 V

supply

Outputs Inputs

L1+ L3+ M

I/O

Ground

Voltage

sensor

switch

Figure 7-40 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0) and TB1-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-52 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-8DI/8DO. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB1-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-9 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC for ET 200B-8DI/8DO

(6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0)

Terminal numbering

TB1-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0 17 24 V (sensor voltage,

it ll j d

33 Ground (outputs) (in-

tllj d

PE (internally jump-

dbt t

2Q0: Output .1 18 internally jumpered,

connected to L3+)

34 ternally jumpered,

connected to M1 M2

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

3Q0: Output .2 19 connec

L3+)

35 connec

M3) nec

screw

)

4Q0: Output .3 20 36

M3)

5 Q0: Output .4 21 37

6 Q0: Output .5 22 38

7 Q0: Output .6 23 39

8 Q0: Output .7 24 40

9I0: Input .0 25 41 Ground (sensor volt-

) (i t ll j

10 I0: Input .1 26 42 age) (internally jump-

ered connected to

11 I0: Input .2 27 43 ere

, connec

M1, M2, M3)

12 I0: Input .3 28 44

M1, M2, M3)

13 I0: Input .4 29 45

14 I0: Input .5 30 46

15 I0: Input .6 31 47

16 I0: Input .7 32 48

- L1+ Voltage supply L1+

for channel group Q0:

.0 to .7

M1 Ground supply M1

for channel group Q0:

.0 to .7

PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

- L2+ not used M2 not used

)

- L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage 24 V

M3 Ground connection,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage

- L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage 24 V

M3 Ground connection,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage

1TB1-4/DC only

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-53

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-8DI/8DO:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB1-4/DC.

L1+ and L3+ are not internally interconnected.

L3+ and terminals 25 ... 32 are interconnected, as are M1, M2, M3 and

terminals 33 ... 48.

The two L3+ terminals are also interconnected.

The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 (1.6 A) in the terminal blocks.

Nevertheless, make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in

the technical data for the electronics block.

Important Note on

Wiring

Fuse

Digital Modules

7-54 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-8DI/8DO is listed in the

tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE and SYNC capa-

bility Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 3.8 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 650 g (22.75 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60 mm

(6.24 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA” LED

Load voltage monitoring Green “L1+” LED

Status of inputs and out-

puts Green LEDs

Supply voltage for sensor supply, load voltage supply

and internal logic

Supply voltage (L1+,L3+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L3+

Logic Typ. 70 mA

Sensors Max. 500 mA

I2t (for inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Inputs

Number of inputs 8

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

For “0” signal – 30 V to 5 V

For “1” signal 13 V to 30 V

Inputs, continued

Input current for “1” signal Typ. 4 mA at 24 V

Min. 2 mA

Delay of inputs 3 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO Possible

Quiescent current v 1.5 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Possible

Cable length of sensors

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

Outputs

Number of outputs 8

Galvanic isolation No

In groups of 8

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output current

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 0.5 A

Delay of outputs

From “0” to “1” Approx. 20 ms

From “1” to “0” Max. 0.5 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 100 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Short-circuit protection Yes

Load current

Total current Max. 2 A

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limit of inductive cutoff

voltage Typ. (L1+) – 55 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-55

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.8 Electronics Block ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0)

The ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA electronics block has the following characteris-

tics:

8 inputs, non-floating

8 outputs, non-floating

The outputs can be deactivated by a programmed deactivation level ap-

plied to the input.

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Input delay: 3 ms

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Possible terminal blocks: TB1/DC, TB1-4/DC or TB3/DC

See Figure 7-18 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-41 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0)

characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-56 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplifieddiagram ofpotential for theET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA and TB1/DC

or TB3/DC:

L3+ M

24 V

supply

I/O

Ground

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-8DI/8DO

HWA

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1/DC or

TB3/DC

L1+

L3+M

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

I0: 0...7 L1+Q0: 0...7

+–

Driver

Voltage

sensor

Outputs Inputs

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-42 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0) and TB1/DC or TB3/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-57

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplifieddiagram ofpotential for theET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA and

TB1-4/DC:

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-8DI/8DO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

TB1-4/DC

L3+M

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

I0: 0...7 L1+Q0: 0...7

+–

Driver

PROFIBUS-DP

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

24 V

supply

Outputs Inputs

L1+ L3+ M

I/O

Ground

Voltage

sensor

switch

Figure 7-43 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0) and TB1-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-58 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the

terminal numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB1-4/DC by way of

example.

Table 7-10 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1/DC; TB1-4/DC and TB3/DC for

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA (6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0)

Terminal numbering

TB1-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0 17 24 V (sensor voltage,

it ll j d

33 Ground (outputs) (in-

tllj d

PE (internally jump-

dbt t

2Q0: Output .1 18 internally jumpered,

connected to L3+)

34 ternally jumpered,

connected to M1 M2

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

3Q0: Output .2 19 connec

L3+)

35 connec

M3) nec

screw

)

4Q0: Output .3 20 36

M3)

5 Q0: Output .4 21 37

6 Q0: Output .5 22 38

7 Q0: Output .6 23 39

8 Q0: Output .7 24 40

9I0: Input .0 25 41 Ground (sensor volt-

) (i t ll j

10 I0: Input .1 26 42 age) (internally jump-

ered connected to

11 I0: Input .2 27 43 ere

, connec

M1, M2, M3)

12 I0: Input .3 28 44

M1, M2, M3)

13 I0: Input .4 29 45

14 I0: Input .5 30 46

15 I0: Input .6 31 47

16 I0: Input .7 32 48

– L1+ Voltage supply L1+

for channel group Q0:

.0 to .7

M1 Ground supply M1

for channel group Q0:

.0 to .7

PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

– L2+ not used M2 not used

)

– L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage 24 V

M3 Ground connection,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage

– L3+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage 24 V

M3 Ground connection,

internal logic and sen-

sor voltage

1TB1-4/DC only

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-59

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Outputs .0 to .7 are deactivated as soon as the programmed cutof f level is

applied to the corresponding input .0 to .7. The relationship between inputs

and outputs is permanent (I .0 ³ O .0, I .1 ³ O .1, ...).

Address assignment:

EB x Inputs .0 to .7

AB y Outputs .0 to .7

AB y + 1 Cutoff level .0 to .7 (negated) 2 consecutive bytes in the

address space of the CPU

The ”cutoff level” byte defaults to ”0”, i.e. output y.n is deactivated (set to

”0”), if signal ”1” is present at input x.n.

0: Output is deactivated by signal ”1” at corresponding input.

1: Output is deactivated by signal ”1” at corresponding input

Table 7-11 Truth Table for Hardware Cutoff of ET 200B-8DI/8DO

HWA

I x.0 .

Ix.7

Oy+1.7

Oy.7 Enable

Oy+1.0 = ”0”

Oy.0

Output byte y

Output byte y+1

with cutoff level en-

tered (per output)

Input byte

”1”

”0”

Oy.0

Oy+1.0

Ix.0

IB x.n OB y+1.n OB y.n Output signal .n

0 0 0 0

0 0 1 1

1 0 any 0 deactivated

1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1

0 1 any 0 deactivated

HW Cutoff

Bit Assignment in

the ”Cutoff Level”

Byte

Digital Modules

7-60 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following notes are important as regards the wiring and hardware cutoff

of ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB1-4/DC.

L1+ and L3+ are not internally interconnected.

L3+ and terminals 17 ... 32 are interconnected, as are M1, M2, M3 and

terminals 33 ... 48.

The two L3+ terminals are also interconnected.

Outputs can switch through temporarily:

Warning

The configuration described below is such that POWER OFF, ST OP or tran-

sient voltage collapse at the terminal block cause the outputs of the

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA to switch through briefly.

Case 3 in Table 7-11 ”Truth Table” (gray background):

”cutoff level” byte OB y+1” programmed to ”0”, outputs set to ”1” by S5/S7

application program. ³ signal ”1” at input I x.n activates the hardware cut-

off.

Cause: POWER OFF, STOP or transient voltage collapse shuts off the sen-

sor voltage, but the logic continues to function for at least another 20 ms

(bridging power failure). The lack of the sensor voltage means that signal

”0” is detected at the inputs and the outputs are enabled if the configuration

is as described above.

The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 (1.6 A) in the terminal blocks.

Nevertheless, make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in

the technical data for the electronics block.

Note

Fuse

Digital Modules

7-61

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA is listed in

the tables below.

Technical Data

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE and SYNC capa-

bility Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 3.8 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 650 g

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA” LED

Load voltage monitoring Green “L1+” LED

Status of inputs and out-

puts Green LEDs

Supply voltage for sensor supply, load voltage supply

and internal logic

Supply voltage (L1+,L3+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 ... 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L3+

Logic Typ. 70 mA

Sensors Max. 500 mA

I2t (for the inrush current) v 0.05 A2s

Inputs

Number of inputs 8

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

For “0” signal – 30 V ... 5 V

For “1” signal 13 V ... 30 V

Inputs (continued)

Input current for

“1” signal Typ. 4 mA at 24 V

Min. 2 mA

Delay of inputs 3 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO Possible

Quiescent current v 1.5 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Possible

Cable length of sensors

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

Outputs

Number of outputs 8

Galvanic isolation No

In groups of 8

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output current

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 0.5 A

Delay of outputs

From “0” to “1” Typ. 50 s

From “1” to “0” Typ. 100 s

By hardware cutoff 3 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 100 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Short-circuit protection Yes

Load current

Total current Max. 2 A

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limit of inductive cutoff

voltage Typ. (L1+) – 55 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-62 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.9 Electronics Block ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133 0BL00-0XB0)

The ET 200B-16DI/16DO has the following characteristics:

16 inputs, non-floating

16 outputs, floating in groups of 8

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Input delay: 3 ms

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Possible terminal blocks: TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC, TB4M/DC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-44 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-63

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DI/16DO and

TB2/DC or TB4/DC:

ET200B-16DI/16DO

TB2/DC or

TB4/DC

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

+–

16x

Driver

L1+ M1

I0: 0...7

I1: 0...7

Q0:

0...7

Driver

Q1:

0...7

L2+

PROFIBUS-DP

I/O

Supply/Voltage

sensor

Ground

L1+M1

Suppr.

logic

L2+M2

Suppr.

logic

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

Digital

inputs

Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4) Digital

outputs

switch

Figure 7-45 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0) and TB2/DC or TB4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-64 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DI/16DO and

TB2-4/DC:

ET200B-16DI/16DO

TB2-4/DC

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

+–

16x

Driver

L1+ M1

I0: 0...7

I1: 0...7

Q0:

0...7

Driver

Q1:

0...7

L2+

PROFIBUS-DP

I/O

Supply/Voltage

sensor

Ground

L1+M1

Suppr.

logic

L2+M2

Suppr.

logic

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

Digital

inputs

Digital

outputs

Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

switch

Figure 7-46 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0) and TB2-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-65

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16DI/16DO. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the termi-

nal numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB2-4/DC by way of exam-

ple.

Table 7-12 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC and TB4M/DC for

ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB2-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0 33 Voltage supply L1+

fh l

65 Ground supply M1

fh l

PE (internally jump-

dbt t

2Q0: Output .1 34 for channel group

Q0: 0 to 7

66 for channel group

Q0: 0 to 7

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

3Q0: Output .2 35

: .

o .

: .

o .

nec

screw

)

4Q0: Output .3 36 68

5 Q0: Output .4 37 69

6 Q0: Output .5 38 70

7 Q0: Output .6 39 71

8 Q0: Output .7 40 72

9 Q1: Output .0 41 Voltage supply L2+

for channel group

73 Ground supply M2

for channel group

10 Q1: Output .1 42 for channel group

Q1: .0 to .7

74 for channel group

Q0: .0 to .7

11 Q1: Output .2 43

Q1:

Q0:

12 Q1: Output .3 44 76

13 Q1: Output .4 45 77

14 Q1: Output .5 46 78

15 Q1: Output .6 47 79

16 Q1: Output .7 48 80

17 I0: Input .0 49 24 V (sensor voltage)

(internally jumpered

81 Ground (sensor volt-

age) (internally jump

18 I0: Input .1 50 (internally jumpered,

connected to L5+)

82 age) (internally jump-

ered, connected to

19 I0: Input .2 51

connected

L5+)

ered

connected

M5)

20 I0: Input .3 52 84

)

21 I0: Input .4 53 85

22 I0: Input .5 54 86

23 I0: Input .6 55 87

24 I0: Input .7 56 88

25 I1: Input .0 57 89

26 I1: Input .1 58 90

27 I1: Input .2 59 91

28 I1: Input .3 60 92

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-66 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-12 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC and TB4M/DC for

ET 200B-16DI/16DO (6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 41

Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 1

29 I1: Input .4 61 24 V (sensor voltage)

(internall j mpered

93 Ground (sensor volt-

age) (internall j mp

PE (internally jump-

ered b t not con

30 I1: Input .5 62 (internally jumpered,

connected to L5+)

94 age) (internally jump-

ered connected to

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

31 I1: Input .6 63 connecte

)

95 ere

, connecte

)

necte

screw

)

32 I1: Input .7 64 96

M5)

- L5+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and

sensor voltage 24 V

M5 Ground connection,

internal logic and

sensor voltage

PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

- L5+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and

sensor voltage 24 V

M5 Ground connection,

internal logic and

sensor voltage

1TB2-4/DC only; in the TB4M/DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections (see Section 7.2.7)

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16DI/16DO:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB2-4/DC.

If all actuators are connected by two-wire cables to the TB2/DC, TB4/DC

or TB2-4/DC, connect the ground of an actuator and the supply for the

reference potential per group by means of a DIN 46231 cable cleat.

L1+, L2+ and L5+ or M1, M2 and M5 are not interconnected.

L5+ and terminals 49 ... 64 are interconnected, as are M5 and terminals

81 ... 96.

The two L5+ terminals are also internally interconnected.

The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 (2.5 A) in the terminal blocks.

Nevertheless, make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in

the technical data for the electronics block.

Important Note on

Wiring

Fuse

Digital Modules

7-67

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16DI/16DO is listed in the

tables below.

Technical Data

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE and SYNC capa-

bility Yes

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 5.5 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 800 g (28 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN ”LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF ”LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA” LED

Load voltage monitoring Green “L1+/L2+” LEDs

Status of inputs and out-

puts Green LEDs

Supply voltage for outputs, load voltage supply and

internal logic

Supply voltages (L1+,

L2+, L5+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 ... 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L5+

Logic Typ. 85 mA

Sensors Max. 1 A

I2t (for inrush current) v 0.05 A2s

Inputs

Number of inputs 16

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

For “0” signal – 30 V ... 5 V

For “1” signal 13 V ... 30 V

Inputs (continued)

Input current

For “1” signal Typ. 4 mA at 24 V

Min. 2 mA

Delay of inputs 3 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO Possible

Quiescent current v 1.5 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Possible

Cable length of sensors

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

Outputs

Number of outputs 16

Galvanic isolation Yes

In groups of 8

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output current

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 0.5 A

Delay of outputs

From “0” to “1” Approx. 20 ms

From “1” to “0” Max. 0.5 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 1000 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Short-circuit protection Yes

Load current per group

Total current Max. 2 A

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limit of inductive cutoff

voltage Typ. (L1+/L2+) – 55 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-68 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.10 Electronics Blocks ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0)

and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms (6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0)

The ET 200B-24DI/8DO and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms electronics blocks

have the following characteristics:

24 inputs, non-floating

8 outputs, floating in groups of 8

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Input delay:

6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0 ³ 3 ms

6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0 ³0.2 ms

Load voltage: 24 V DC

Possible terminal blocks: TB2/DC, TB2-4/DC, TB4/DC, TB4M/DC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 7-47 Front Elevation: ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0) and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms

(6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-69

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-24DI/8DO or

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2 ms and TB2/DC or TB4/DC:

L5+ M5

24 V

supply

I/O

Ground

ET200B-24DI/8DO

ET200B-24DI/8DO-

0.2ms

TB2/DC or

TB4/DC

Digital

inputs

Voltage sensor

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

+–

24x

Driver

Digital

outputs

Supply/

L1+ M1

Suppr.

logic

L1+ M1

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

I0: 0...7

I1: 0...7

I2: 0...7

Q0:

0...7

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

switch

Figure 7-48 Block Diagram: ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0) or ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms

(6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0) and TB2/DC or TB4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-70 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-24DI/8DO or

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2 ms and TB2-4/DC:

L5+ M5

ET200B-24DI/8DO

ET200B-24DI/8DO-

0.2ms

TB2-4/DC

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

5 V

Logic

24 V

5 V

24 V

+–

24x

Driver

Suppr.

logic

L1+ M1

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

I0: 0...7

I1: 0...7

I2: 0...7

Q0:

0...7

PROFIBUS-DP

PE Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

Station

number

selection

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

L5+ M5

I/O

Ground

Voltage sensor

Supply/

L1+ M1

Digital

inputs

Digital

outputs 24 V

supply

switch

Figure 7-49 Block Diagram: ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0) or ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms

(6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0) and TB2-4/DC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-71

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-24DI/8DO and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2 ms. For the sake of clarity,

the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks, taking

the TB2-4/DC by way of example.

Table 7-13 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC; TB2-4/DC and TB4/DC for ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7

133-0BN01-0XB0) and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms (6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB2-4/DC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41

1Q0: Output .0 33 Voltage supply L1+

for channel group

65 Ground M1 for chan-

nel group Q0: 0 to 7

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

2Q0: Output .1 34 for channel group

0: .0 to .7 66 nel group Q0: .0 to .7 ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw

)

3Q0: Output .2 35

Q0:

nected

screw)

4Q0: Output .3 36 68

5 Q0: Output .4 37 69

6 Q0: Output .5 38 70

7 Q0: Output .6 39 71

8 Q0: Output .7 40 72

9I0: Input .0 41 24 V (sensor voltage,

connected to L5+)

73 Ground (sensor volt-

age connected to

10 I0: Input .1 42 connected to L5+) 74 age, connected to

)

11 I0: Input .2 43 75

M5)

12 I0: Input .3 44 76

13 I0: Input .4 45 77

14 I0: Input .5 46 78

15 I0: Input .6 47 79

16 I0: Input .7 48 80

17 I1: Input .0 49 81

18 I1: Input .1 50 82

19 I1: Input .2 51 83

20 I1: Input .3 52 84

21 I1: Input .4 53 85

22 I1: Input .5 54 86

23 I1: Input .6 55 87

24 I1: Input .7 56 88

25 I2: Input .0 57 89

26 I2: Input .1 58 90

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-72 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-13 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2/DC; TB2-4/DC and TB4/DC for ET 200B-24DI/8DO (6ES7

133-0BN01-0XB0) and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms (6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 41

Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

27 I2: Input .2 59 24 V (sensor voltage,

connected to L5+)

91 Ground (sensor volt-

age connected to

PE (internally jump-

ered but not con

28 I2: Input .3 60 connected to L5+) 92 age, connected to

)

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw

)

29 I2: Input .4 61 93

M5)

nected

screw)

30 I2: Input .5 62 94

31 I2: Input .6 63 95

32 I2: Input .7 64 96

– L5+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and

sensor voltage 24 V

M5 Ground connection,

internal logic and

sensor voltage

PE (internally jump-

ered, but not con-

nected to PE screw)

– L5+ Voltage supply,

internal logic and

sensor voltage 24 V

M5 Ground connection,

internal logic and

sensor voltage

1TB2-4/DC only; in the TB4M/DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections (see Section 7.2.7)

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-24DI/8DO and ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2 ms:

The terminals for PE on the 4-tier terminal block are not connected to the

PE connection of terminal block TB2-4/DC.

If all actuators are connected by two-wire cables to the TB2/DC, TB4/DC

or TB2-4/DC, connect the ground of an actuator and the supply for the

reference potential per group by means of a DIN 46231 cable cleat.

L1+ and L5+ and M1 and M5 are not interconnected.

L5+ and terminals 41 ... 64 are interconnected, as are M5 and terminals

73 ... 96.

The two L5+ terminals are also interconnected.

The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 (2.5 A) in the terminal blocks.

Nevertheless, make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in

the technical data for the electronics block.

Important Note on

Wiring

Fuse

Digital Modules

7-73

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics blocks ET 200B-24DI/8DO and

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2 ms is listed in the tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE and SYNC capa-

bility Yes*

Galvanic isolation to

SINEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Max. 5.5 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 800 g (28 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Red “DIA” LED

Load voltage monitoring Green “L1+” LED

Status of inputs and out-

puts Green LEDs

Supply voltage for sensor supply, load voltage supply

and internal logic

Supply voltage (L1+,L5+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L5+

Logic Typ. 85 mA

Sensors Max. 1 A

I2t (for the inrush current) < 0.05 A2s

Inputs

Number of inputs 24

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

For “0” signal – 30 V to 5 V

For “1” signal 13 V to 30 V

Input current for

“1” signal Typ. 4 mA at 24 V

Min. 2 mA

Inputs, continued

Delay of inputs for

6ES7 133-0BN00-0XB0 3 ms

Delay of inputs for

6ES7 133-0BN10-0XB0 0.2 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO Possible

Quiescent current v 1.5 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Possible

Cable length of sensors

Unshielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

Outputs

Number of outputs 8

Galvanic isolation Yes

In groups of 8

Output voltage

For “0” signal Max. 2 V (idle)

For “1” signal Min. (supply voltage

– 3 V)

Output current

For “0” signal Max. 1 mA

For “1” signal Max. 0.5 A

Delay of outputs

From “0” to “1” Approx. 20 s

From “1” to “0” Max. 0.5 ms

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 1000 Hz

Inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Short-circuit protection Yes

Load current

Total current Max. 2 A

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Setting a digital input Possible

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on current interrup-

tion

Typ. (L5+) – 55 V

Cable length Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-74 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.11 Electronics Block ET 200B-16DI-AC (6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0)

The ET 200B-16DI-AC electronics block has the following characteristics:

16 inputs, floating in groups of 4

Input voltage: 120/230 V AC

Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches acc. to IEC 1131,

type 1

Possible terminal block: TB6/AC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.



Figure 7-50 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DI-AC (6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-75

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DI-AC and TB6/AC:

+–

Station

number

selection

PROFIBUS-DP

L1 NAB

120/230V

AC supply

Digital

inputs

Galvanic

isolation

Logic

Input

Voltage

sensor

N conductor

ET 200B-16DI-AC

Suppr.

logic/fuse

Conn.

PROFI-

BUS-DP

TB6/AC

5 V

120/

230

24 V

120/

230

+–

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

1L1 2N

2L1 3N

3L1 4N

4L1

I0:

0...3 2N 3N 4N

I0:

4...7 I1:

0...3 I1:

4...7

+–

M5 V

24V

M24

Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

Figure 7-51 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DI-AC (6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0) and TB6/AC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-76 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16DI-AC. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal block, taking the TB6/AC by way of example.

Table 7-14 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16DI-AC

(6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB6/AC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3

1I0: Input .0 33 Sensor voltage 1L1 for channel

I0 0 t 3

65 Sensor voltage 1N for channel

I0 0 t 3

2I0: Input .1 34 I0: .0 to .3 66 I0: .0 to .3

3I0: Input .2 35 67

4 I0: Input .3 36 68

5not used 37 69

6 not used 38 70

7 not used 39 71

8 not used 40 not used 72 not used

9 not used 41 not used 73 not used

10 not used 42 Sensor voltage 2L1 for channel

I0 4 t 7

74 Sensor voltage 2N for channel

I0 4 t 7

11 not used 43 I0: .4 to .7 75 I0: .4 to .7

12 not used 44 76

13 I0: Input .4 45 77

14 I0: Input .5 46 78

15 I0: Input .6 47 79

16 I0: Input .7 48 80

17 I1: Input .0 49 Sensor voltage 3L1 for channel

I1 0 t 3

81 Sensor voltage 3N for channel

I1 0 t 3

18 I1: Input .1 50 I1: .0 to .3 82 I1: .0 to .3

19 I1: Input .2 51 83

20 I1: Input .3 52 84

21 not used 53 85

22 not used 54 86

23 not used 55 87

24 not used 56 not used 88 not used

25 not used 57 not used 89 not used

26 not used 58 Sensor voltage 4L1 for channel

I1: .4 to .7 90 Sensor voltage 4N for channel

I1: .4 to .7

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-77

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-14 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16DI-AC

(6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

27 not used 59 Sensor voltage 4L1 for channel

I1 4 t 7

91 Sensor voltage 4N for channel

I1 4 t 7

28 not used 60 I1: .4 to .7 92 I1: .4 to .7

29 I1: Input .4 61 93

30 I1: Input .5 62 94

31 I1: Input .6 63 95

32 I1: Input .7 64 96

- L1 Voltage supply, internal logic N Voltage supply, internal logic

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16DI-AC:

SIf installed in an 230 V AC system, the following must always be con-

nected to the same outer conductor (same phase):

– 1L1/1N and 2L1/2N (same phase)

– 3L1/3N and 4L1/4N (same phase)

SIf installed in an 230 V AC system with ambient temperatures in excess

of 40 _C only 12 inputs can be used and rated input current must not ex-

ceed 240 V AC.

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-78 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16DI-AC is listed in the

tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to

SINEC L2-DP Yes, 500 V DC to logic,

1500 V AC to connection

terminals

Power losses

at 230 V Typ. 6 W

at 120 V Typ. 4.5 W

Weight (EB and TB) 811 g (29 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green ‘‘RUN” LED

Bus monitoringSINEC

L2-DP Red ‘‘BF” LED

Status of inputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for internal logic

Supply voltage L1

Rated value 120/230 V AC

Permissible range 85 to 264 V AC

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Current consumption

from L1 Typ. 60 mA

Inputs

Number of inputs 16

Galvanic isolation Yes (optocouplers)

In groups of 4

Input voltage

Rated value 120/230 V AC

For ‘‘0” signal 0 to 40 V AC

For ‘‘1” signal 79 to 264 V AC

Input current for ‘‘1” sig-

nal 3 to 16 mA

At 120 V, 60 Hz Typ. 6.5 mA

At 230 V, 50 Hz Typ. 10.5 mA

Type of input acc. to

IEC 1131 Type 1

Delay of inputs 0 to 25 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO No

Permissible quiescent

current 2 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Yes

Cable length Max. 600 m (1968 ft)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-79

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.12 Electronics Block ET 200B-16DO-AC (6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0)

The ET 200B-16DO-AC electronics block has the following characteristics:

16 outputs, floating in groups of 4

Output current: 0.5 A

Load voltage: 120/230 V AC

Possible terminal block: TB6/AC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.



Figure 7-52 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16DO-AC (6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-80 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16DO-AC and TB6/AC:

1L1

Q0:

0...3 2L1 3L1 4L1

Q0:

4...7 Q1:

0...3 Q1:

4...7

4x 4x 4x

Station

number

selection

PROFIBUS-DP

L1 NAB

120/230V

AC supply

Logic

ET 200B-16DO-AC

Suppr.

logic/fuse

Conn.

PROFI-

BUS-DP

TB6/AC

5 V

120/

230

24 V

120/

230

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

Digital

outputs

Out.

Supply

N conductor 1N

1L1 2N

2L1 3N

3L1 4N

4L1

M5 V

24V

M24

Screw for

grounding

(see Sec. 3.4)

Galvanic

isolation

Figure 7-53 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16DO-AC (6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0) and TB6/AC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-81

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16DO-AC. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB6/AC by way of example.

Table 7-15 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16DO-AC

(6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB6/AC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3

1Q0: Output .0 33 Voltage supply 1L1 for channel

Q0 0 t 3

65 Voltage supply 1N for channel

Q0 0 t 3

2Q0: Output .1 34 Q0: .0 to .3 66 Q0: .0 to .3

3Q0: Output .2 35 67

4 Q0: Output .3 36 68

5not used 37 69

6 not used 38 70

7 not used 39 71

8 not used 40 not used 72 not used

9 not used 41 not used 73 not used

10 not used 42 Voltage supply 2L1 for channel

Q0 4 t 7

74 Voltage supply 2N for channel

Q0 4 t 7

11 not used 43 Q0: .4 to .7 75 Q0: .4 to .7

12 not used 44 76

13 Q0: Output .4 45 77

14 Q0: Output .5 46 78

15 Q0: Output .6 47 79

16 Q0: Output .7 48 80

17 Q1: Output .0 49 Voltage supply 3L1 for channel

Q1 0 t 3

81 Voltage supply 3N for channel

Q1 0 t 3

18 Q1: Output .1 50 Q1: .0 to .3 82 Q1: .0 to .3

19 Q1: Output .2 51 83

20 Q1: Output .3 52 84

21 not used 53 85

22 not used 54 86

23 not used 55 87

24 not used 56 not used 88 not used

25 not used 57 not used 89 not used

26 not used 58 Voltage supply 4L1 for channel

Q1: .4 to .7 90 Voltage supply 4N for channel

Q1: .4 to .7

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-82 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-15 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16DO-AC

(6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

27 not used 59 Voltage supply 4L1 for channel

Q1 4 t 7

91 Voltage supply 4N for channel

Q1 4 t 7

28 not used 60 Q1: .4 to .7 92 Q1: .4 to .7

29 Q1: Output .4 61 93

30 Q1: Output .5 62 94

31 Q1: Output .6 63 95

32 Q1: Output .7 64 96

- L1 Voltage supply, internal logic N Voltage supply, internal logic

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16DO-AC:

If installed in an AC 230 V system, the following must always be con-

nected to the same outer conductor (same phase):

– 1L1/1N and 2L1/2N (same phase)

– 3L1/3N and 4L1/4N (same phase)

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-83

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16DO-AC is listed in the

tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes, 500 V DC to logic,

1500 V AC to connection

terminals

Power losses Max. 11 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 805 g (29 oz)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green ‘‘RUN‘‘ LED

Bus monitoring

SINEC L2-DP Red ‘‘BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Load voltage monitoring No

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for internal logic

Supply voltage L1

SRated value 120/230 V AC

SPermissible range 85 to 264 V AC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

SCurrent consumption

from L1 Typ. 150 mA

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Outputs

Number of outputs 16

Galvanic isolation Yes (optocouplers)

SIn groups of

SSignal voltage

79 to 264 V AC

Output voltage

SFor ‘‘1” signal

(w50 mA) Max. L1 – 1.5 V

SFor ‘‘1” signal

(v50 mA) Max. L1 – 8.5 V

Output current

SFor ‘‘0” signal Max. 1.3 mA

Delay of outputs Max. 20 ms

Short-circuit protection No

Switching frequency

SResistive load 10 Hz

SInductive load 0.5 Hz

SLamp load 1 Hz

Load current per output in

preferred mounting

position

S0 _C to 40 _C

(32 _ F to 104 _ F) 0.5 A

S40 _C to 60 _C

(32 _ F to 140 _ F) 0.35 A

Load current per output in

other mounting positions

S0 _C to 40 _C

(32 _ F to 104 _ F) 0.35 A

Lamp load Max. 25 W

Size of motor starter Max. size 3 acc. to NEMA

Parallel connection of 2

outputs Possible

(though not in order to

increase power)

Setting a digital input Possible

Cable length Max. 600 m (1968 ft)

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-84 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.13 Electronics Block ET 200B-16RO-AC (6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0)

The ET 200B-16RO-AC electronics block has the following characteristics:

16 relay outputs, floating in groups of 1

Load voltage: 120 V AC

24 ... 150 V DC

Output current: 4A for outputs 0.0, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.7

12 A for outputs 0.1 to 0.6 and 1.1 to 1.6

Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, switches, motor starters, small-

power motors, motors and lamps.

Possible terminal block: TB6/AC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.

Ć16ROĆAC

Figure 7-54 Front Elevation: ET 200B-16RO-AC (6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-85

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-16RO-AC and TB6/DC:

Station

number

selection

PROFIBUS-DP

L1 NAB

M5 V

120/230V

AC supply

Galvanic

isolation

Logic

ET 200B-16RO-AC

Suppr.

logic/fuse

Conn.

PROFI-

BUS-DP

TB6/AC

5 V

120/

230

24 V

120/

230

24V

M24 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

16x

Relay

outputs

Contact

N con-

ductor

PE Screw for ground-

ing (see Sec. 3.4)

Figure 7-55 Block Diagram: ET 200B-16RO-AC (6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0) and TB6/AC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-86 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-16RO-AC. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the terminal

numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB6/AC by way of example.

Table 7-16 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16RO-AC

(6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB6/AC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3

1Q0: Connection 0/1 33 Q0: Connection 0/0 65 not used

2Q0: Connection 1/0 34 66 not used

3Q0: Connection 1/1 35 67 not used

4Q0: Connection 2/0 36 68 not used

5Q0: Connection 2/1 37 69 not used

6Q0: Connection 3/0 38 70 not used

7Q0: Connection 3/1 39 71 not used

8 not used 40 not used 71 not used

9 not used 41 not used 73 not used

10 Q0: Connection 4/1 42 Q0: Connection 7/0 74 not used

11 Q0: Connection 4/0 43 75 not used

12 Q0: Connection 5/1 44 76 not used

13 Q0: Connection 5/0 45 77 not used

14 Q0: Connection 6/1 46 78 not used

15 Q0: Connection 6/0 47 79 not used

16 Q0: Connection 7/1 48 80 not used

17 Q1: Connection 0/0 49 Q1: Connection 0/0 81 not used

18 Q1: Connection 1/0 50 82 not used

19 Q1: Connection 1/1 51 83 not used

20 Q1: Connection 2/0 52 84 not used

21 Q1: Connection 2/1 53 85 not used

22 Q1: Connection 3/0 54 86 not used

23 Q1: Connection 3/1 55 87 not used

24 not used 56 not used 88 not used

25 not used 57 not used 89 not used

26 Q1: Connection 4/1 58 Q1: Connection 7/0 90 not used

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-87

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-16 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-16RO-AC

(6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

27 Q1: Connection 4/0 59 Q1: Connection 7/0 91 not used

28 Q1: Connection 5/1 60 92 not used

29 Q1: Connection 5/0 61 93 not used

30 Q1: Connection 6/1 62 94 not used

31 Q1: Connection 6/0 63 95 not used

32 Q1: Connection 7/1 64 96 not used

- L1 Voltage supply, internal logic N Voltage supply, internal logic

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-16RO-AC:

Protect the module against inductive voltage surges at the relay contacts.

Suitable surge protectors are RC elements or varistors connected across

the relay contact or across the load. The size and ratings of the protective

elements must be dimensioned to suit the size and type of load.

Voltage surge protectors of this kind extend the service life of the relay

contacts.

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-88 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-16RO-AC is listed in the

tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes, 500 V DC to logic,

1500 V AC to connection

terminals

Power losses 20 W

Weight (EB and TB) 814 g (29 oz)

Dimensions

(EB and TB: W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.09 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green ‘‘RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red ‘‘BF” LED

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Load voltage monitoring No

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for internal logic

Supply voltage L1

SRated value 120/230 V AC

SPermissible range 85 to 264 V AC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

SCurrent consumption

from L1 Typ. 210 mA

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Relay outputs

Number of outputs

SHigh current 4 (0.0, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.7)

SLow current 12 (0.1 to 0.6, 1.1 to 1.6)

Galvanic isolation Yes (relays)

SIn groups of 1

Short-circuit protection No

Relay type Takamisawa NY 24 W-K

Output voltage

SRated value 24 to 150 V DC

120 V AC

SPermissible range 0,1 to 150 V DC

79 to 150 V AC

Continuous current Ith Max. 4 A

(for high current points)

Max. 2 A

(for low current points)

Switching capacity of con-

tacts

SHigh current points

Resistive load 0 to 40 _C 60 _C

(32 to 104 _ F) (140_ F)

24 V DC/120 V AC 4 A 2 A

120 V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A

Inductive load

24 V DC/120 V AC 2 A 2 A

120 V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A

SLow current points

Resistive and

inductive loads 0 to 40 _C 60 _C

(32 to 104 _ F) (140_ F)

24 V DC/120 V AC 2 A 1 A

120 V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A

Switching cycles of con-

tacts acc. to VDE 0660,

Part 200

SDC-11 u100 x 106

SAC-15 u300 x 105

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 10 Hz

SInductive load Max. 2 Hz

Cable length Max. 600 m (1968 ft.)

Setting a digital input Possible

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-89

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

7.3.14 Electronics Block ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC (6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0)

The ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC electronics block has the following characteris-

tics:

8 inputs, floating in groups of 4

8 relay outputs, floating in groups of 1

Input voltage: 120/230 V AC

Inputs suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches acc. to IEC

1131, type 1

8 relay outputs, floating in groups of 1

Output load voltage: 120 V AC

24 ... 150 V DC

Output current: 4 A for outputs 0.0 and 0.7

2 A for outputs 0.1 to 0.6

Outputs suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, switches, motor starters,

small-power motors, motors and lamps.

Possible terminal block: TB6/AC

See Figure 7-22 for the precise dimensions.



Figure 7-56 Front Elevation: ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC (6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Digital Modules

7-90 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC and

TB6/DC:

PROFIBUS DP TxD RxD

L1 NAB

L1 N

ET 200B-8DI/

8RO-AC

TB6/AC

5 V

120/

230

24 V

120/

230

+–

1N 1L1 2N

I0:

0...3 2N

I0:

4...7

+–

2L1

M5 V

24V

M24

Station

number

selection

120/230 V

AC supply

Digital

inputs

Galvanic

isolation

Logic

Volt. sens.

N cond.

Suppr.

logic/fuse

Conn.

PROFI-

BUS-DP

Interface between electronics block and terminal block

Screw for grounded

configuration

(see Section 3.4) Relay

outputs

Figure 7-57 Block Diagram: ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC (6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0) and TB6/AC

Block Diagram

Digital Modules

7-91

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC. For the sake of clarity, the table also shows the ter-

minal numbering of the terminal blocks, taking the TB6/AC by way of exam-

ple.

Table 7-17 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC

(6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0)

Terminal numbering TB6/AC

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3

1I0: Input .0 33 Sensor voltage 1L1 for channel

I0 0 t 3

65 Sensor voltage 1N for channel

I0 0 t 3

2I0: Input .1 34 I0: .0 to .3 66 I0: .0 to .3

3I0: Input .2 35 67

4 I0: Input .3 36 68

5not used 37 69

6 not used 38 70

7 not used 39 71

8 not used 40 not used 72 not used

9 not used 41 not used 73 not used

10 not used 42 Sensor voltage 2L1 for channel

I0 4 t 7

74 Sensor voltage 2N for channel

I0 4 t 7

11 not used 43 I0: .4 to .7 75 I0: .4 to .7

12 not used 44 76

13 I0: Input .4 45 77

14 I0: Input .5 46 78

15 I0: Input .6 47 79

16 I0: Input .7 48 80

17 Q0: Output 0/1 49 Q0: Output 0/0 81 not used

18 Q0: Output 1/0 50 82 not used

19 Q0: Output 1/1 51 83 not used

20 Q0: Output 2/0 52 84 not used

21 Q0: Output 2/1 53 85 not used

22 Q0: Output 3/0 54 86 not used

23 Q0: Output 3/1 55 87 not used

24 not used 56 not used 88 not used

25 not used 57 not used 89 not used

Pin Assignment

Digital Modules

7-92 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 7-17 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6/AC for ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC

(6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0), continued

Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3Terminal tier 2

26 Q0: Output 4/1 58 Q0: Output 7/0 90 not used

27 Q0: Output 4/0 59 91 not used

28 Q0: Output 5/1 60 92 not used

29 Q0: Output 5/0 61 93 not used

30 Q0: Output 6/1 62 94 not used

31 Q0: Output 6/0 63 95 not used

32 Q0: Output 7/1 64 96 not used

- L1 Voltage supply, internal logic N Voltage supply, internal logic

The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC:

SIf installed in an 230 V AC system with ambient temperatures in excess

of 40 _C only 6 inputs can be used and rated input current must not ex-

ceed AC 240 V.

SIf installed in an 230 V AC system, the following must always be con-

nected to the same outer conductor (same phase):

– 1L1/1N and 2L1/2N (same phase)

– 3L1/3N and 4L1/4N (same phase)

SProtect the module against inductive voltage surges at the relay contacts.

Suitable surge protectors are RC elements or varistors connected across

the relay contact or across the load. The size and ratings of the protective

elements must be dimensioned to suit the size and type of load.

SVoltage surge protectors of this kind extend the service life of the relay

contacts.

Important Note on

Wiring

Digital Modules

7-93

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of electronics block ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC is listed in the

tables below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes, 500 V DC to logic,

1500 V AC to connection

terminals

Power losses 13 W

Weight (EB and TB) 811 g (29 oz)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 235 x 130 x 60 mm

(9.17 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions

Voltage monitoring Green LED ‘‘RUN”

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red LED ‘‘BF”

Group diagnostics for

short-circuit, load voltage

failure

Load voltage monitoring No

Status of outputs Green LEDs

Supply voltage for internal logic

Supply voltage L1

Rated value 120/230 V AC,

Permissible range 85 to 264 V AC

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Current consumption

from L1 Typ. 165 mA

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum baud rate

is 1500 kbaud.

Inputs

Number of inputs 8

Galvanic isolation Yes (optocouplers)

In groups of 4

Input voltage

Rated value 120/230 V AC

For ‘‘0” signal 0 to 40 V AC

For ‘‘1” signal 79 to 264 V AC

Input current for ‘‘1” sig-

nal 3 to 16 mA

at 120, 60 Hz Typ. 6.5 mA

at 230 V, 50 Hz Typ. 10.5 mA

Type of input acc. to

IEC 1131 Type 1

Delay of inputs 0 to 25 ms

Connection of 2-wire

BERO No

Permissible quiescent

current 2 mA

Connection of mechanical

switches Yes

Cable length of sensors

Cable length Max. 600 m (1968 ft.)

Relay outputs

Number of outputs

High current 2 (0.0, 0.7)

Low current 6 (0.1 to 0.6)

Galvanic isolation Yes (relays)

In groups of 1

Short-circuit protection No

Relay type Takamisawa NY 24W-K

Output voltage

Rated value 24 to 150 V DC

120 V AC

Permissible range 0.1 to 150 V DC

79 to 150 V AC

Continuous current Ith Max. 4 A

(for high current points)

Max. 2 A

(for low current points)

Technical Data

Digital Modules

7-94 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Relay outputs, continued

Switching capacity of con-

tacts

SHigh current points

Resistive load 0 to 40 _C 60 _C

(32 to 104 _ F) (140_ F)

24 V DC/

120/230 V AC 4 A 2 A

120 V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A

Inductive load

24 V DC/

120/230 V AC 2A 2A

120 V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A

SLow current points

Resistive and inductive

loads 0 to 40 _C 60 _C

(32 to 104 _ F) (140_ F)

24 V DC/

120/230 V AC 2A 1 A

120 V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A

Switching cycles of con-

tacts acc. to VDE 0660,

Part 200

SDC-11 > 100 x 106

SAC-15 > 300 x 105

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 10 Hz

SInductive load Max. 2 Hz

Cable length Max. 600 m (1968 ft.)

Setting a digital input Possible

Digital Modules

8-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Analog Modules

There are a number of analog modules for connecting measured-value sen-

sors and loads/actuators.

This chapter contains the technical data for the analog modules.

The technical data for each analog module is accompanied by

details of the measured-value sensors and loads that can be connected,

information on analog-value display for operation with SIMATIC S5 and

S7,

a list of permissible address IDs, and

the parameters of the analog modules.

In Section you will find on Page

8.1 Analog modules 8-2

8.2 Terminal block TB8 (6ES7 193-0CD40-0XA0) 8-3

8.3 Terminal block TB8 and bus connector 8-4

8.4 Electronics block ET 200B-4/8AI

(6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0) 8-5

8.5 Electronics block ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0) 8-51

8.6 Electronics block ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0) 8-76

Introduction

In this Chapter

8-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.1 Analog Modules

The tables below give an overview of the ET 200B analog modules.

The following types of electronics block are available:

Table 8-1 Analog Electronics Blocks of ET 200B

Electronics block Description

ET 200B-4/8AI 8 analog differential inputs or

8 thermocouples, 4 resistance measurement, 4 resis-

tance thermometer (PT 100, Ni 100) (measuring principle: inte-

grating)

ET 200B-4AI 4 analog differential inputs

(measuring principle: successive approximation)

ET 200B-4AO 4 analog outputs

A single terminal block is available for all analog electronics blocks:

Table 8-2 Analog Terminal Block of ET 200B

Terminal block Description

TB8 4/8-channel, spring-latch terminals

Introduction

List of Electronics

Blocks

List of Terminal

Blocks

Analog Modules

8-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.2 Terminal Block TB8 (6ES7 193-0CD40-0XA0)

Dimensional drawing: terminal block TB8 (spring-latch terminals)

Mounting holes

Figure 8-1 Dimensional Drawing: Terminal Block TB8 (Spring-Latch Terminals)

Figure 8-2 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the TB8

(spring-latch terminals).

Coding plug

Figure 8-2 Terminal Numbering: Terminal Block TB8 (Spring-Latch Terminals)

Dimensional Draw-

ing, TB8

Terminal Number-

ing

Analog Modules

8-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.3 Terminal Block TB8 and Bus Connector

Figure 8-3 contains the dimensional drawings (side elevation) of the terminal

block TB8 with electronics block installed and two different bus connectors.

6ES7 972-0BA10-0XB0 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XB0

Figure 8-3 Dimensional Drawing: Side Elevation with Bus Connectors (6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 and

6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0)

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Analog Modules

8-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4 Electronics Block ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

The ET 200B-4/8AI electronics block has the following characteristics:

8 inputs in 4 channel groups,

galvanically isolated from voltage supply to the internal logic

T ransducers supported:

– Thermocouples: types E, J, K, L, N, T, U

– Resistance thermometers: Pt 100, Ni 100

– Resistors: 48 W, 150 W, 300 W, 600 W

– Voltage sensors: 80 mV, 250 mV, 500 mV, 1000 mV (2-wire

connection)

Measuring principle: integrating

Integration times: 2.5 ms, 16.7 ms, 20 ms, 100 ms

Supply voltage: 24 V DC

Measured-value range selection via COM ET 200 or STEP 7 or directly

via parameterization telegram (see Chapter 4)

Dimensional drawing of the ET 200B-4/8AI:

Figure 8-4 Dimensional Drawing: ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Analog Modules

8-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure 8-5 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the

ET 200B-4/8AI.

Figure 8-5 Connection Diagram: ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

The following aspects of the ET 200B-4/8AI are described below:

In Section you will find on Page

8.4.1 Connecting transducers 8-7

8.4.2 Configuration options 8-20

8.4.3 Setting the operating mode 8-23

8.4.4 Analog-value representation, operation with SIMATIC S5 8-26

8.4.5 Analog-value representation, operation with SIMATIC S7 8-39

8.4.6 Schematic circuit diagram, terminal assignment and techni-

cal data 8-47

Terminal Number-

ing

List of Subsec-

tions

Analog Modules

8-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4.1 Connecting Transducers

You can connect the following to the ET 200B-4/8AI electronics block:

Up to 8 thermocouples with compensating box

Up to 4 resistance thermometers in 2-wire or 4-wire connection

Up to 4 resistors in 2-wire or 4-wire connection

Up to 8 voltage sensors (2-wire connection)

Mixed configurations with different types of sensor are possible.

A channel group consists of two channels set with the parameterization soft-

ware COM ET 200 or STEP 7 (diagnostics enable, measurement type, mea-

suring range, etc.) and with the coding plug on the TB8 (input circuit).

The settings of a channel group apply to all the channels in the group in ques-

tion.

There are two ways of measuring analog signals from thermocouples, resis-

tance thermometers, resistors and voltage transducers:

Floating-ground measurement

Ground-referenced measurement

You set the input circuit for floating-ground or ground-referenced measure-

ment by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 (one coding plug per channel

group)

In the case of floating-ground measurement (differential measurement), each

signal line has its own signal reference conductor.

Differential measurement is required in the following cases:

If the sensors are connected to different potentials and

If the different signal sources are physically apart.

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM) of the differential

inputs to analog ground (MA) is 1V.

The maximum permissible voltage difference between MA and PE must not

exceed 75 V DC/60 V AC.

Avoid ground loops!

Possible Connec-

tions

Channel Group

Input Circuit

Floating-Ground

Measurement

Analog Modules

8-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In the case of ground-referenced measurement, all signal reference conduc-

tors in the TB8 are connected to a common reference point (analog ground

MA).

To avoid ground loops, galvanically isolated and ungrounded signal sources

(thermocouples, Pt 100, voltage sources) are required.

Note

Connect MA to PE ( ) to enhance noise immunity in the case of ground-

referenced measurement.

The ET 200B-4/8AI does not have an internal compensating box. The influ-

ence of temperature on the reference junction can be countered with a com-

pensating box.

Please note the following rules when connecting a compensating box:

In a configuration with external compensation you need only one com-

pensating box for all the thermocouples of a single type (E, J, K, L, N, T,

U) in a module.

Connect the compensating box to terminals K+ and K- (see for example

Figure 8-6).

In a configuration with external compensation you can connect a maxi-

mum of 4 different thermocouples (a different type of thermocouple for

each channel group) if you use a separate compensating box for each con-

nection.

In this case the unused K+ and K- terminals must be connected to MA.

(see Figure 8-7)

In a configuration with external compensation and one compensating box

per channel the same thermocouple type must be used per channel group.

The compensating box requires a floating power supply. The power sup-

ply unit of the compensating box must have a grounded braided shield.

Figures 8-6 to 8-8 illustrate the connection options for thermocouples. A

maximum of 8thermocouples can be connected.

We recommend the following compensating boxes for connection to the

ET 200B-4/8AI:

Compensating box type U with current stabilizer.

Reference junction with built-in power supply unit.

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

Connecting Ther-

mocouples with

Compensating

Boxes

Valid Compensat-

ing Boxes

Analog Modules

8-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The order numbers of the compensating boxes and the associated components

can be found in the tables below.

Table 8-3 Compensating Box Type U with Current Stabilizer.

Accessories Weight Order Number

Type U compensating box

Reference temp. 20°C (68 °F)³ 0 mV

0°C (32°F)³ 0 mV 0.22 kg (7.7 oz.)

0.22 kg (7.7 oz.) C70153-A502-A1

C70153-A502-A5

Insert for type U compensating box

(as spare part and for installation in dis-

tribution boxes or similar)

Reference temp. 20 °C (68°F)³ 0 mV

0°C (32°F)³ 0 mV 0.09 kg (3.15 oz.)

0.09 kg (3.15 oz.) C70153-A502-B7

C70153-A502-B9

Current stabilizer for feeding a com-

pensating box for thermocouple Fe/Cu

Ni, Ni Cr/Ni

Reference temp. 20 °C (68°F)³ 0 mV

0°C (32°F)³ 0 mV 0.25 kg (8.75 oz.)

0.25 kg (8.75 oz.) M55232-A1

M55232-A2

Table 8-4 Reference Junction with Built-in Power Supply Unit

Accessories Order Number

Reference junction with built-in power supply

unit for busbar installation

Auxiliary energy 220 V AC

110 V AC

24 V AC

24 V DC

Connection to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Type L

Fe/Cu Ni Type J

Ni Cr/Ni Type K

Cu-CuNi Type U

Cu/Cu Ni Type T

Reference temperature 0°C

20°C

M72166-

Order Numbers

Analog Modules

8-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following pages contain a connection example for every connection pos-

sibility and measuring principle. Please note the following rules.

Please note the following rules when connecting measured-value sensors to

the ET 200B-4/8AI:

The permissible potential difference at the differential input (x.1 ´ x.2 or

x.3 ´ x.4, x = 0 to 3) must not exceed +1 V.

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM) between the

differential inputs (x.1 ´ x.2, x.3 ´ x.4, x = 0 to 3) and analog ground

MA is + 1 V.

The maximum permissible isolation voltage between analog ground (MA)

and PE ( ) or between the reference potential of the supply voltage (M)

is 75 V DC/60 V AC.

You must short-circuit the connection terminals of unused voltage inputs

and connect them to MA.

If the coding plug is in the C position, the connection to MA is not re-

quired (already jumpered internally).

If you connect only one voltage sensor (2-wire connection) to one chan-

nel, you must also short-circuit the remaining free differential input of the

channel group and connect it to MA.

If the coding plug is in the C position, the connection to MA is not re-

quired (already jumpered internally).

If you connect a compensating box, you must short-circuit terminals “K+”

and “K-”. For this purpose, set the coding plug to the “C” position.

Note

Please note the explanation of shielding of analog lines in

Sections 3.1 and 3.5.

On the Following

Pages

Rules

Analog Modules

8-11

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The figure below illustrates the connection of thermocouples of the same

type with one compensating box for the entire module (floating-ground

measurement):

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

Comp.

box

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Thermal link

Shield

.. .. .

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

UCM v"1V

Figure 8-6 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box (Floating-

Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v + 1V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA.

Floating-Ground

Measurement

K+

K–

....

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

V V

Analog Modules

8-12 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The figure below illustrates the connection of thermocouples of different

types with one compensating box per channel (floating-ground measure-

ment):

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Thermal link

Shield

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

UCM v"1V

Comp.

box Comp.

box

Figure 8-7 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box per Channel

(Floating-Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v + 1V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA

Floating-Ground

Measurement

K+

K–

ÂÂ

....

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

V V

Analog Modules

8-13

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The figure below illustrates the connection of thermocouples of the same

type with one compensating box for the entire module (ground-referenced

measurement):

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

Comp.

box

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Thermal link

Shield

.. .. .

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Figure 8-8 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box

(Ground-Referenced Measurement)

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

K+

K–

....

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

V V

Analog Modules

8-14 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

If resistance thermometers or resistors are connected, resistance can be mea-

sured by means of a 2-wire connection.

The resistance thermometer/resistor receives a constant current supply via

terminals x.1 and x.2. Voltage drops on the measuring lines may falsify the

results. This type of measurement is useful if the measuring lines are short

and thick or when the requirements for measuring accuracy are low.

Figures 8-9 and 8-10 show the two methods of connecting resistance ther-

mometers and resistors in a 2-wire connection, taking a Pt 100 by way of

example. A maximum of 4 resistance thermometers (Pt 100, Ni 100) or resis-

tors can be connected.

The connection of resistance thermometers (Pt 100) with 2-wire connections

(floating-ground measurement) is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

CBB

Pt 100 Pt 100

Shield

VCM v"1V

Figure 8-9 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 2-W ire Connections

(Floating-Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v "1V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA.

Connection of

Resistance Ther-

mometers/

Resistors (2-Wire

Connection)

Floating-Ground

Measurement

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-15

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In the case of ground-referenced measurement, you must connect terminal

x.4 externally with analog ground (MA).

The connection of resistance thermometers (Pt 100) with 2-wire connections

(ground-referenced measurement) is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

CBB

Pt 100 Pt 100

Shield

Ext. connection ..

Figure 8-10 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 2-W ire Connections

(Ground-Referenced Measurement)

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-16 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

If resistance thermometers or resistors are connected, resistance can be mea-

sured by means of a 4-wire connection.

A constant current Ic is fed to the resistance thermometer via terminals x.1

and x.2. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via

x.3/x.4. This means that voltage drops on the “constant current lines” do not

corrupt the result of the measurement. The measurement inputs have a high

resistance so that only a negligible voltage drop occurs on the measuring

lines.

Figures 8-11 and 8-12 show the two methods of connecting resistance ther-

mometers and resistors in a 4-wire connection, taking a Pt 100 by way of

example.

The connection of resistance thermometers (Pt 100) with 4-wire connections

(floating-ground measurement) is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

AAC

...

Shield

ICIC

UCM v"1V

Pt 100 Pt 100

Figure 8-1 1 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 4-Wire Connections

(Floating-Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v "1V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA.

Connection of Re-

sistance Thermom-

eters (4-Wire Con-

nection)

Floating-Ground

Measurement

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-17

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The connection of resistance thermometers (Pt 100) with 4-wire connections

(ground-referenced measurement) is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

DC 75V/

AC 60V

Max. DC 75V/AC 60V

DDC

...

Shield

ICIC

Pt 100 Pt 100

Figure 8-12 Connection of Resistance Thermometers (Pt 100) with 4-W ire Connections

(Ground-Referenced Measurement)

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-18 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The channels can also be used to connect voltage sensors (" 80 mV,

" 250 mV, " 500 mV, " 1000 mV).

Two voltage sensors per channel group can be connected.

Figures 8-13 and 8-14 show the two methods of connecting voltage sensors.

Two-wire connection of voltage sensors (floating-ground measurement) is

shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

AAC

Shield

U–

–+

VCMv"1V

Figure 8-13 2-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4/8AI

(Floating-Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v "1V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA.

Connection of

Voltage Sensors

Floating-Ground

Measurement

....

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

V V

Analog Modules

8-19

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Two-wire connection of voltage sensors (ground-referenced measurement) is

shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

CCC

Shield

U–

–+

Figure 8-14 2-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4/8AI

(Ground-Referenced Measurement)

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

....

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

V V

Analog Modules

8-20 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4.2 Configuration Options

The information in this section applies to the type file SI801ABE.200.

The type file contains the possible configurations. The configuration you

choose depends on the wiring of the module.

Table 8-5 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B-4/8AI with

COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 for connecting voltage sensors and ther-

mocouples.

Table 8-5 lists only the slots for configuring the input areas (slots 4 to 11).

Slots 1 to 3 have the default value ”004”.

Table 8-5 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200B-4/8AI, with only Voltage Sensors and Ther-

mocouples Connected

Confi-

gura

Terminals used Length1

(in

Meaning

gura-

tion Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 (in

words)

tion

Chan-

nel 0 Chan-

nel 1 Chan-

nel 2 Chan-

nel 3 Chan-

nel 4 Chan-

nel 5 Chan-

nel 6 Chan-

nel 7

words)

0.1/0.2 0.3/0.4 1.1/1.2 1.3/1.4 2.1/2.2 2.3/2.4 3.0/3.1 3.3/3.4

8AI 8A start address

is assigned for

the entire mod-

ule, addresses

for8words

arereserved.

(= module ad -

dressing)

8 x 1AI 8A separate start

address can be

7 x 1AI 7address can be

assi

ned for

6 x 1AI 6

assigned

for

each channel.

( single

5 x 1AI 5(= single-

channel ad-

4 x 1AI 4

channel

dressing)

3 x 1AI 3

2 x 1AI 2

1 x 1AI 1

1Length of user data; = Connection of measuring lines

Note

If you connect voltage sensors/thermocouples and resistors/thermal resistors

to the same module, you have a mixed configuration as shown in Tables 8-5

and 8-6 (see example below).

Type File

Configuration for

Voltage Sensors,

Thermocouples

Analog Modules

8-21

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-6 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B-4/8AI with

COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 for connecting thermal resistors and for

resistance measurement.

Table 8-6 lists only the slots for configuring the input areas (slots 4 to 7).

Slots 1 to 3 have the default value ”004”.

Table 8-6 Possible IDs for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B-4/8AI, with only Thermal resistors and Re-

sistors Connected

Config-

uration

Terminals used Length1

(in

Meaning

uration Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 (in

words

)

Chan-

nel 0 Chan-

nel 1 Chan-

nel 2 Chan-

nel 3 Chan-

nel 4 Chan-

nel 5 Chan-

nel 6 Chan-

nel 7

words)

0.1/0.2 0.3/0.4 1.1/1.2 1.3/1.4 2.1/2.2 2.3/2.4 3.0/3.1 3.3/3.4

8AI o o o o 8A start ad-

dress is as-

signed for the

entire module,

addresses for

8 words are

reserved. In-

put data only

in the words

for channels

0, 2, 4 and 6.

(= module ad-

dressing)

5 to 8

x 1AI This configu-

ration is re-

jected as er-

rored.

Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

Channel

0Channel

1Channel

2Channel

0.1/0.2 0.3/0.4 1.1/1.2 1.3/1.4 2.1/2.2 2.3/2.4 3.0/3.1 3.3/3.4

4 x 1AI o o o o 4A separate

start address

can be as-

3 x 1AI o o o 3signed for

each channel.

Addresses are

2 x 1AI o o 2reserved for a

maximum of

4 words.

(= single

1 x 1AI o 1

(

= s

channel ad-

dressing)

1Length of user data

= Connection of measuring lines

o = Connection of constant-current lines

Configuration for

Resistors/Thermal

Resistors

Analog Modules

8-22 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In this example voltage sensors and thermal resistors (Pt 100) are connected.

Table 8-7 Example for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B-4/8AI

Config-

uration

Terminals used Length1

(in

Meaning

uration Chan. group 0 Chan. group 1 Chan. group 2 Chan. group 3 (in

words

)

Chan-

nel 0 Chan-

nel 1 Channel

2Chan-

nel 3 Chan-

nel 4 Chan-

nel 5 Chan-

nel 6

words)

0.1/

0.2 0.3/

0.4 1.1/

1.2 1.3/

1.4 2.1/

2.2 2.3/

2.4 3.0/

3.1 3.3/

3.4

mea-

sure-

ment

mea-

sure-

ment

Pt 100 U

mea-

sure-

ment

mea-

sure-

ment

mea-

sure-

ment

mea-

sure-

ment

6 voltage sensors and

one Pt 100 thermal

resistor

7 1AI o 7

Chan. group 0 Chan. group 1 Chan. group 2 Chan. group 3

Channel 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Channel 3 Ch. 4 Ch. 5

0.1/

0.2 0.3/

0.4 1.1/

1.2 1.3/

1.4 2.1/

2.2 2.3/

2.4 3.0/

3.1 3.3/

3.4

Pt 100 U

mea-

sure-

ment

mea-

sure-

ment

Pt 100 2 voltage sensors and

two Pt 100 thermal

resistors

4 1AI o o 4

1Length of user data

= Connection of measuring lines

o = Connection of constant-current lines

Bear the following in mind when configuring the modules:

If you connect resistance thermometers/resistors, the assignment defined

in the configuration and the parameterization must match.

If you connect 4 resistance thermometers/resistors, the only possible con-

figuration options are 8AI or 4 1AI.

If you use single-channel addressing and configure more channels than is

possible for parameterization with resistance thermometers/resistors, an

error message is displayed for the module.

If you connect resistance thermometers/resistors and configure with the

8AI ID, the channels not used by the resistance inputs you configure

(channels 1, 3, 5 and 7) are also transmitted to the DP master. In the input

area addresses that cannot be used for these channels are assigned.

If you connect resistance thermometers/resistors and use single-channel

addressing, addresses are assigned only for the resistance inputs.

Diagnostics messages and diagnostics data (slave diagnostics) are re-

turned only for the configured channels.

Example

Notes on Configur-

ing

Analog Modules

8-23

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4.3 Setting the Operating Mode

You set the operating mode of the ET 200B-4/8AI electronics block

by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 terminal block

and

by means of the COM ET 200 or STEP7 parameterization software.

The coding plugs of the TB8 enable you to set the input circuit of the TB8

for analog value measurement of each individual channel group of the

ET 200B-4/8AI in accordance with the measured-value sensor connected and

the desired mode of measurement.

The possible settings of the coding plugs are: ”A”, ”B”, ”C” and ”D”.

For details of the relationships between the settings of the coding plugs and

the mode of measurement and the measured-value sensors, see Section 8.4.1.

Section 3.1 describes how to change the settings of the coding plugs.

Some parameters of the ET 200B-4/8AI listed on the following pages apply

only to individual channel groups. Table 8-8 lists the assignment of TB8 ter-

minals to channel groups.

Table 8-8 Assignment of Terminals to Channel Groups

Channel Group Terminals

Channel group 0 Terminals 0.1/0.2

Terminals 0.3/0.4

Channel group 1 Terminals 1.1/1.2

Terminals 1.3/1.4

Channel group 2 Terminals 2.1/2.2

Terminals 2.3/2.4

Channel group 3 Terminals 3.1/3.2

Terminals 3.3/3.4

Setting the Operat-

ing Mode

Coding Plugs

Channel Group

Analog Modules

8-24 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-9 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B-4/8AI

with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7.

You can set these parameters for the ET 200B-4/8AI if you use the type file

SI801ABE.200.

Table 8-9 Parameters for ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

Parameter Explanation Value Range

Diagnostics alarm Diagnostics-alarm enable for module Disable

Enable

End-of-cycle alarm End-of-cycle alarm enable for module Disable

Enable

Limit-value alarm Limit-value alarm enable for module Disable

Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel group 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa-

rately for each channel group

Disable

Diagnostics enable for channel group 1 rately for each channel group Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel group 2

Diagnostics enable for channel group 3

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 0 Wire break monitoring enabled

separately for each channel group:

onl fitth t

Disable

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 1

only for resistance thermometers

(Pt 100, Ni 100), thermocouples, resis-

tors and volta

e sensors  80 mV

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 2

tors

and

voltage

sensors



Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 3

Integration time for channel group 0 Enter an optimum integration time for

the A/D converter to help suppress

2.5 ms

16 7 ms

Integration time for channel group 1 the A/D converter to help suppress

noise volta

e. 16.7 ms

20 ms

Integration time for channel group 2

noise

voltage

100 ms

Integration time for channel group 3

Parameters

Analog Modules

8-25

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-9 Parameters for ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0), continued

Parameter Value RangeExplanation

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel group 0 You can set the measurement type and

range separately for each channel group

For voltage measurement: " 1 V

" 0.5 V

" 0.25 V

"80 V

Channel not activated

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel group 1 For resistance thermometer with linea-

rization:

For thermocouple with external refer

Pt 100 standard range

Ni 100 standard range

Type N with linearization

" 80 mV

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel group 2

ermocoup

e w

ith

erna

er-

ence junction:

ype

ith

near

Type E with linearization

Type J with linearization

Type L with linearization

Type T with linearization

Type K with linearization

Type U with linearization

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel group 3 For resistance measurement: 48 ohms

150 ohms

300 ohms

600 ohms

Type U with linearization

Representation of measured values Sets representation of the measured val-

ues for module SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

Measured value representation: S5 Sets data format for analog value repre-

sentation, SIMATIC S5 Complement of twos

Amount with sign

Upper limit value for channel 0 Upper and lower limit values for each

channel 0

*32768 ... 32767

Lower limit value for channel 0 0

*32768 ... 32767

Upper limit value for channel 2

(channel 1*) 0

*32768 ... 32767

Lower limit value for channel 2

(channel 1*) 0

*32768 ... 32767

: Default

* For the ET 200B-4/8AI, only the combination of single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group

0 for resistance measurement (Pt 100, Ni 100, R) requires parameterization of the ”Upper/lower limit values” for

channel 1. In all other cases (i.e. module addressing and single channel addressingand parameterization of channel

group 0 for other than resistance measurement (Pt 100, Ni 100, R), you parameterize ”Upper/lower limit values” for

channel 2.

Analog Modules

8-26 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4.4 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S5

If you operate the ET 200B-4/8AI with SIMATIC S5, you can utilize the ana-

log value representation of SIMATIC S7 (higher measured-value resolution:

max. 14 bits + sign). See Section 8.4.5 for the measured-value tables for ana-

log value representation in SIMATIC S7.

Analog values can be represented in two data formats with the

ET 200B-4/8AI for SIMATIC S5:

12-bit complement of twos representation (range: –2048 to +2047 units)

11-bit amount and 1-bit sign (range: –2048 to +2047 units)

The Table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B-4AI:

Table 8-10 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

High Byte Low Byte

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Analog value

representation SI 211 210 29282726252423222120X F s

Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have no significance for the amount of the measured

value. See Table 8-11 for a detailed description of these bits.

Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have the following meaning in the bit pattern of the

analog input value:

Table 8-11 Description of the Bits (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

Bit Meaning Signal Sta-

tus Meaning of the Signal Sta-

tus

OV Overflow bit 1 Overrange1

FFault bit 1 Wire break; the measured

value read in is not valid2

SI Sign 0“+” sign

1“–” sign

X Irrelevant – –

1In the event of an overflow at one measuring point, the overflow bits of the other chan-

nels remain unaffected; this means that the values of the other channels are correct and

can be evaluated.

2When the ET 200B-4/8AI signals a wire break (fault bit F = 1), the overflow bit OV is

also set.

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S7

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S5

Supplementary

Bits

Analog Modules

8-27

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The two tables below show the assignments of analog to digitized measured

values for the measuring ranges:  80 mV,  250 mV,  500 mV and

 1000 mV.

Table 8-12 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0; Mea-

suring Ranges:  80 mV,  250 mV,  500 mV and  1000 mV; Complement of Twos)

Units Measured Value in mV Digitized Measured Value X F O

VRange

80

250

500

1000

mV 1514131211109876543210

> 2409 94.10 294.07 588.13 1176.26 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

2408 94.06 293.95 587.89 1175.78 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange

: : : : : :

2049 80.04 250.12 500.24 1000.48 0 100000000001000

2048 80.00 250.0 500.0 1000.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1024 40.00 125.00 250.00 500.00 0 010000000000000

10.039 0.12 0.24 0.48 0 000000000001000 Nominal

range

0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 000000000000000 range

–1 –0.039 –0.12 –0.24 –0.48 1 111111111111000

–1024 –40.00 –125.00 –250.00 –500.00 1 110000000000000

–2048 –80.00 –250.0 –500.0 –1000.0 1 100000000000000

–2049 –80.04 –250.12 –500.24 –1000.48 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Overrange

: : : : : :

–2408 –94.06 –293.95 587.89 –1175.78 1 011010011000000

< –2409 –94.10 –294.07 –588.13 –1176.26 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

Voltage Measuring

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-28 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

T able 8-13 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0; Measur-

ing Ranges: " 80 mV, " 250 mV, " 500 mV and " 1000 mV; Amount and Sign)

Units Measured Value in mV SI Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

"80

"250

"500

"1000

mV 15 1413121110987654321 0 Range

> 2409 94.10 294.07 588.13 1176.26 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Over-

flow

2408 94.06 293.95 587.89 1175.78 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Over-

range

: : : : : : range

2049 80.04 250.12 500.24 1000.48 0 1 0000000000100 0

2048 80.00 250.0 500.0 1000.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1024 40.00 125.00 250.00 500.00 0 0 1000000000000 0

10.039 0.12 0.24 0.48 0 0 0000000000100 0 No-

minal

0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0 0000000000000 0

minal

range

–1 –0.039 –0.12 –0.24 –0.48 1 0 0000000000100 0

–1024 –40.00 –125.00 –250.00 –500.00 1 0 1000000000000 0

–2048 –80.00 –250.0 –500.0 –1000.0 1 1 0000000000000 0

–2049 –80.04 –250.12 –500.24 –1000.48 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Over-

range

: : : : : : range

–2408 –94.06 –293.95 587.89 –1175.78 1 1 0010110100000 0

< –2409 –94.10 –294.07 –588.13 –1176.26 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Over-

flow

Note

Bit 15 of the digitized measured value indicates the sign.

The following applies: SI = 0 ³ positive value; SI = 1 ³ negative value.

Analog Modules

8-29

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

2 The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for the resistance measuring ranges: 48 W, 150 W, 300 W and 600 W.

Table 8-14 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI for Resistance Measurement

(Complement of Twos)

Units Resistance in WDigitized Measured Value X F OV Range

48 150 300 600 151413121110987654321 0

w 2409 56.46 176.44 352.88 705.76 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

2408 56.44 176.37 352.73 705.47 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Over

: : : : : : Over-

range

2049 48.02 150.07 300.14 600.29 0 10000000000100 0 range

2048 48 150 300 600 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1536 36 112.5 225 450 0 01100000000000 0

1024 24 75 150 300 0 01000000000000 0

512 12 37.5 75 150 0 00100000000000 0 Nominal

range

1 0.023 0.072 0.144 0.288 0 00000000000100 0

0 0 0 0 0 000000000000000 0

0(Negative values physically im-

possible)

000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Overflow

:possible) :Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire

break

Measuring

Ranges: Resis-

tance Measure-

ment

Analog Modules

8-30 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for resistance thermometers (Pt 100):

Table 8-15 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI for Resistance Thermometers

(Complement of Twos)

Units Resistance

in W

Tempera-

ture in °C

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

in Wture in °C151413121110987654321 0

> 1766 > 400 > 883 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow

1766 883 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Overrange1

: : : Overrange

1702 851 0 01101010011000 1

1700 390.26 850 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1400 345.13 700 0 01010111100000 0

1000 280.90 500 0 00111110100000 0

600 212.02 300 0 00100101100000 0

300 157.31 150 0 00010010110000 0

200 138.50 100 0 00001100100000 0 Nominal

range

2 100.39 1 0 00000000001000 0

–0 100.00 0 0 00000000000000 0

–40 92.16 –20 1 11111101100000 0

–80 84.27 –40 1 11111011000000 0

–200 60.25 –100 1 11110011100000 0

–202 –101 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Overrange1

: : : Overrange

–494 –247 1 11100001001000 1

< –494 < –247 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow

1In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Pt 100 Resistance

Thermometers

Analog Modules

8-31

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for resistance sensors (Ni 100):

Table 8-16 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors

(Complement of Twos)

Units Resistance

in W

Tempera-

ture in °C

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

in Wture in °C151413121110987654321 0

> 590 > 295 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow

590 295 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Overrange1

: : : Overrange

502 251 0 00011111011000 1

500 289.2 250 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

498 288.1 249 0 00011111001000 0

400 240.7 200 0 00011001000000 0

200 161.8 100 0 00001100100000 0

2100.5 1 0 00000000001000 0 Nominal

range

0 100 0 0 00000000000000 0 range

–2 99.5 –1 1 11111111111000 0

–20 94.6 –10 1 11111110110000 0

–80 79.1 –40 1 11111011000000 0

–118 70 –59 1 11111000101000 0

–120 69.5 –60 1 11111000100000 0

–122 –61 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Overrange1

: : : Overrange

–210 –105 1 11110010111000 1

< –210 < –105 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Ni 100 Resistance

Sensors

Analog Modules

8-32 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type E thermocouples.

Table 8-17 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization; Type E Ther-

mocouples (Nickel-Chrome/Copper-Nickel, to IEC 548, Part 1; Complement of Twos)

Units Thermal e.

m. f. in

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

2 1 0

> 1200 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange

1001 1001 0 00111110100100 1

verrange

1000 76.358 1000 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

800 61.022 800 0 00110010000000 0

400 28.943 400 0 00011001000000 0

100 6.317 100 0 00000110010000 0 Nominal range

1 0.059 1 0 00000000000100 0

0 0 0 000000000000000 0

–1 –0.059 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –5.237 –100 1 11111001110000 0

–200 –8.824 –200 1 11110011100000 0

–269 –9.833 –269 1 11101111001100 0

–270 –9.835 –270 1 11101111001000 0

–271 –271 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Overrange

verrange

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1for a reference temperature 0 °C

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type E Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-33

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type J thermocouples.

Table 8-18 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization: Type J Ther-

mocouple (Iron/Copper-Nickel (Constantan), to IEC 584) (Complement of Twos)

Units Thermal

e. m. f.

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

in mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1485 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange2

1201 1201 0 01001011000100 1

1200 69.536 1200 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1000 57.942 1000 0 00111110100000 0

500 27.388 500 0 00011111010000 0

100 5.268 100 0 00000110010000 0

10.05 1 0 00000000000100 0 Nominal range

0 0 0 0 00000000000000 0

–1 –0.05 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –4.632 –100 1 11111001110000 0

–150 –6.499 –150 1 11110110101000 0

–199 –7.868 –199 1 11110011100100 0

–200 –7.890 –200 1 11110011100000 0

–201 –201 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overrange2

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1For a reference temperature of 0 °C (32 °F)

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type J Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-34 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type K thermocouples.

Table 8-19 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization: Type K Ther-

mocouples (Nickel-Chrome/Nickel-Aluminum, to IEC 584) (Complement of Twos )

Units Thermal

e. m. f.

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

in mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

> 2359 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange2

1370 1370 0 01010101101000 1

1369 54.773 1369 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

1000 41.269 1000 0 00111110100000 0

500 20.640 500 0 00011111010000 0

150 6.137 150 0 00001001011000 0 Nominal range

100 4.095 100 0 00000110010000 0

10.039 1 0 00000000000100 0

0 0 0 000000000000000 0

–1 –0.039 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –3.553 –100 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

–101 –3.584 –101 1 11111001101100 0 Accuracy

–150 –4.912 –150 1 11110110101000 0 v 2 K

–200 –5.891 –200 1 11110011100000 0

–201 –201 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overrange2

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1For a reference temperature of 0 °C (32 °F)

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type K Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-35

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type L thermocouples.

Table 8-20 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization: Type L Ther-

mocouples (Iron/Copper-Nickel (Constantan), to DIN 43710) (Complement of Twos)

Units Thermal

e. m. f.

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

in mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1361 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange2

901 901 0 00111000010100 1

900 53.14 900 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

500 27.85 500 0 00011111010000 0

250 13.75 250 0 00001111101000 0

100 +5.37 100 0 00000110010000 0

10.05 1 0 00000000000100 0 Nominal

range

0 0 0 0 00000000000000 0

–1 –0.05 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –4.75 –100 1 11111001110000 0

–150 –6.60 –150 1 11110110101000 0

–190 –7.86 –190 1 11110100001000 0

–199 –8.12 –199 1 11110011100100 0

–200 –200 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Overrange2

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1For a reference temperature of 0 °C (32 °F)

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type L Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-36 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type N thermocouples.

Table 8-21 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization; Type N Ther-

mocouples (Nickel-Chrome-Silicium/Nickel-Silicium, to IEC 548-1; Complement of Twos )

Units Thermal e.

m. f. in

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

2 1 0

> 1550 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange

1301 1301 0 01010001010100 1

verrange

1300 47.502 1300 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1000 36.248 1000 0 00111110100000 0

500 16.744 500 0 00011111010000 0

100 2.774 100 0 00000110010000 0 Nominal range

1 0.026 1 0 00000000000100 0

0 0 0 000000000000000 0

–1 –0.026 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –2.407 –100 1 11111001110000 0

–250 –4.313 –250 1 11110000011000 0

–269 –4.345 –269 1 11101111001100 0

–270 –4.345 –270 1 11101111001000 0

–271 –271 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Overrange

verrange

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1for a reference temperature 0 °C

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type N Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-37

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type T thermocouples.

Table 8-22 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization; Type T Thermo-

couples (Copper/Copper-Nickel, to IEC 548, Part 1; Complement of Twos )

Units Thermal e.

m. f. in

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

> 540 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange

401 401 0 00011001000100 1

verrange

400 20.869 400 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

399 20.807 399 0 00011000111100 0

200 9.286 200 0 00001100100000 0

100 4.277 100 0 00000110010000 0 Nominal range

1 0.039 1 0 00000000000100 0

0 0 0 000000000000000 0

–1 –0.039 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –3.378 –100 1 11111001110000 0

–200 –5.603 –200 1 11110011100000 0

–269 –6.256 –269 1 11101111001100 0

–270 –6.258 –270 1 11101111001000 0

–271 –271 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Overrange

verrange

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1for a reference temperature 0 °C

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type T Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-38 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type U thermocouples.

Table 8-23 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI with Linearization; Type U Ther-

mocouples (Copper/Copper-Nickel, to DIN 43710; Complement of Twos )

Units Thermal e.

m. f. in

Tempera-

ture in

Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range

mV1

ture

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

2 1 0

> 850 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow

Overrange

601 601 0 00100101100100 1

verrange

600 34.31 600 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

599 34.24 599 0 00100101011100 0

300 14.90 300 0 00010010110000 0

100 4.25 100 0 00000110010000 0 Nominal range

1 0.04 1 0 00000000000100 0

0 0 0 000000000000000 0

–1 –0.04 –1 1 11111111111100 0

–100 –3.4 –100 1 11111001110000 0

–150 –4.69 –150 1 11110110101000 0

–199 –5.68 –199 1 11110011100100 0

–200 –5.70 –200 1 11110011100000 0

–201 –201 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

Overrange

verrange

–273 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire break

1for a reference temperature 0 °C

2In the overrange, any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited.

Measuring Range,

Type U Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-39

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4.5 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S7

If you operate the ET 200B-4/8AI with SIMATIC S7 the analog values are

represented in complements of twos.

The table below shows the analog value representation of the

ET 200B-4/8AI:

Table 8-24 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC S7 and ET 200B-4/8AI

High Byte Low Byte

Bit Number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Analog Value

Representation SI 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

Bit 15 has no significance for the amount of the measured value. It merely

represents the sign.

The resolution for the measured value depends directly on the integration

time selected for the ET 200B-4/8A. In other words, the longer the integra-

tion time for an analog input channel, the higher is the resolution of the mea-

sured value.

If the resolution of an analog module is less than 15 bits, the analog value

entry is left-aligned. The unused lower-value places are padded with ”0”.

Table 8-25 lists the possible resolutions of the ET 200B-4/8AI as a function

of integration time. The ”x” characters indicate the bits that are of no signifi-

cance for the measured value.

Table 8-25 Possible Resolutions of Analog Values: ET 200B-4/8AI

Integration Time

Resolution in Bits

Analog Value

eso

Bit

sHigh Byte Low Byte

2.5 ms 9 (+SI) SI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x

16.7 ms, 20 ms 12 (+SI) SI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x

100 ms 14 (+SI) SI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S7

Resolution

Analog Modules

8-40 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the representation of the digitized measuring values

of the ET 200B-4/8AI for the measuring ranges: " 80 mV, " 250 mV,

" 500 mV and " 1000 mV.

Table 8-26 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI (Measuring Ranges: " 80 mV,

" 250 mV, " 500 mV and " 1000 mV)

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range "1V

Units

Range

" 80 mV Range

" 250 mV Range

" 500 mV Range " 1 V Decimal Hexade-

cimal Range

w 94.074 w 293.98 w 587.96 w 1.17592 32767 7FFFHOverflow

94.071 293.97 587.94 1.17588 32511 7EFFH

: : : : : : Overrange

80.003 250.01 500.02 1.00004 27649 6C01H

80.000 250.00 500.00 1.000 27648 6C00H

60.000 187.50 375.00 0.750 20736 5100H

: : : : : : Nominal range

– 60.000 – 187.50 – 375.00 – 0.750 –20736 AF00 H

– 80.000 – 250.00 – 500.00 –1.000 –27648 9400H

– 80.003 – 250.01 – 500.02 – 1.00004 –27649 93FFH

: : : : : : Underrange

– 94.074 – 293.98 – 587.96 – 1.17592 –32512 8100H

v– 94.077 v– 293.99 v– 587.98 v– 1.17596 –32768 8000 HUnderrun

Voltage Measuring

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-41

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for the resistance measuring ranges: 48 W, 150 W, 300 W and 600 W.

Table 8-27 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI for Resistance Measurement

Measuring

Range 48 Ω

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Units

Range 48 ΩRange

150 ΩRange

300 ΩRange

600 ΩDecimal Hexade-

cimal Range

u 56.4427 u 176.3835 u 352.767 u 705.5339 32767 7FFFHOverflow

56.4427 176.3835 352.767 705.5339 32511 7EFFH

: : : : : : Overrange

48.0174 150.0054 300.0109 600.0217 27649 6C01H

48.000 150.000 300.000 600.000 27648 6C00H

36.000 112.500 225.000 450.000 20736 5100H

Nominal range

: : : : : :

range

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0H

(Negative values physically impossible) –32768 8000HUnderrun

Measuring Range,

Resistance Mea-

surement

Analog Modules

8-42 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for resistance sensors (Pt 100).

Table 8-28 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI for

Pt 100 Resistance Sensors

Temperature

Range Stan-

dard

Pt 100

850 C

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w1000.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1000.0

850.1

10000

8501

2710H

2135H

Overrange

850.0

–200.0

8500

–2000

2134H

F830H

Nominal range

–200.1

–243.0

–2001

–2430

F82FH

F682H

Underrange

v– 243.1 –32768 8000HUnderrun

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for resistance sensors (Ni 100).

Table 8-29 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI for

Ni 100 Resistance Sensors

Temperature

Range Stan-

dard

Ni 100

250 C

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w295.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

295.0

250.1

2950

2501

0B86H

09C5H

Overrange

250.0

–60.0

2500

–600

09C4H

FDA8H

Nominal range

–60.1

–105.0

–601

–1050

FDA7H

FBE6H

Underrange

v– 105.1 –32768 8000HUnderrun

Measuring Range,

Pt 100 Resistance

Sensors

Measuring Range,

Ni 100 Resistance

Sensors

Analog Modules

8-43

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type E thermocouples.

Table 8-30 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type E Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type E

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w1200.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1200.0

1000.1

12000

10001

2EE0H

2711H

Overrange

1000.0

–270.0

10000

–2700

2710H

F574H

Nominal range

v–270.1 –2701 F573HUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F0C4H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type J thermocouples.

Table 8-31 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type J Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type J

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w1450.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1450.0

1200.1

14500

12001

38A4H

2EE1H

Overrange

1200.0

–210.0

12000

–2100

2EE0H

F7CCH

Nominal range

v–210.1 –2101 F7CBHUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F3C1H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

Measuring Range,

Type E Thermo-

couples

Measuring Range,

Type J Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-44 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type K thermocouples.

Table 8-32 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type K Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type K

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w1622.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1622.0

1372.1

16220

13721

3F5CH

3599H

Overrange

1372.0

–270.0

13720

–2700

3598H

F574H

Nominal range

v–270.1 –2701 F573HUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F0C4H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type L thermocouples.

Table 8-33 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type L Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type L

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w1150.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1150.0

900.1

11500

9001

2CECH

2329H

Overrange

900.0

–200.0

9000

–2000

2328H

F830H

Nominal range

v–200.1 –2001 F82FHUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F380H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

Measuring Range,

Type K Thermo-

couples

Measuring Range,

Type L Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-45

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type N thermocouples.

Table 8-34 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type N Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type N

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w1550.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1550.0

1300.1

15500

13001

3C8CH

32C9H

Overrange

1300.0

–270.0

13000

–2700

32C8H

F574H

Nominal range

v–270.1 –2701 F573HUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F0C4H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type T thermocouples.

Table 8-35 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type T Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type T

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w540.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

540.0

400.1

5400

4001

1518H

0FA1H

Overrange

400.0

270.0

4000

–2700

0FA0H

F574H

Nominal range

v–270.1 –2701 F573HUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F0C4H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

Measuring Range,

Type N Thermo-

couples

Measuring Range,

Type T Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-46 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for Type U thermocouples.

Table 8-36 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4/8AI

with Linearization; Type U Thermocouples

Temperature

Range in C

Type U

Decimal Hexadecimal Range

w850.1 32767 7FFFHOverflow

850.0

600.1

8500

6001

2134H

1771H

Overrange

600.0

200.0

6000

–2000

1770H

F830H

Nominal range

v–200.1 –2001 F82FHUnderrange

If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs, the analog-input

module signals underrun when F380H is undershot and outputs 8000H.

Measuring Range,

Type U Thermo-

couples

Analog Modules

8-47

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.4.6 Block Diagram, Terminal Assignment and Technical Data

Simplified representation of potential for the ET 200B-4/8AI and TB8:

PE 24V

supply

Compen-

sating

box

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-4/8AI

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

Station number

selection

Analog TB8

L+MA

Logic

Chnl. gp. 0:

0.1/0.2

0.3/0.4

Coding panels

K+

K-

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

2.3 2.4

2.1 2.2

3.3 3.4

3.1 3.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

Analog

ground

K+; x.1/x.3 K–; x.2/x.4 9x

Chnl. gp. 1:

1.1/1.2

1.3/1.4

Chnl. gp. 2:

2.1/2.2

2.3/2.4

Chnl. gp. 3:

3.1/3.2

3.3/3.4

5 V 24 V

5 V

–5V

PROFIBUS-DP

Connection

PROFIBUS

-DP

switch

Figure 8-15 Block Diagram: ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0) and TB8

Block Diagram

Analog Modules

8-48 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below contains the terminal assignments of the TB8 for

ET 200B-4/8AI, depending on the sensor connected.

Table 8-37 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B-4/8AI

(6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

Terminal num-

bering TB8

Ter-

minal

Assignment When the Following are Connected

minal Thermocouple Resistance Thermome-

ter Voltage Sensor

K+ Compensating box Unassigned Unassigned

K– Compensating box Unassigned Unassigned

x.1 Measuring line (+) Constant current line IC+Measuring line (+)

x.2 Measuring line (–) Constant current line IC–Measuring line (–)

x.3 Measuring line (+) Measuring line (+) Measuring line (+)

x.4 Measuring line (–) Measuring line (–) Measuring line (–)

MAAnalog ground (MA)

L+ Voltage supply, internal logic

M Voltage supply, internal logic

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Note

Certain additional settings must be made for the input circuit by means of

the coding plugs of the TB8. The settings of the coding plugs are illustrated

in Figures 8-6 to 8-14.

Terminal Assign-

ment

Analog Modules

8-49

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of the ET200B-4/8AI electronics block are listed in the

table below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/50

0/1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to the SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Typically 2 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 550 g (19.25

oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60

Diagnostics functions, alarms

Voltage monitoring Green ”RUN” LED

Bus monitoring, SINEC

L2-DP Red ”BF” LED

Group diagnostics Red ”DIA” LED, para-

meterizable

Alarms

Limit-value alarm Yes, parameterizable

channels 0 and 2

Diagnostics alarm

End-of-cycle alarm

Yes, parameterizable

Supply voltage for inputs and internal logic

Supply voltage(L+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 ... 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L+

Logic 80 mA

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum possible

baud rate is 1500 kbaud.

Inputs

Number of inputs 8 voltage inputs or 4 in-

puts for resistance ther-

mometers and resistors

or 8 inputs for thermo-

couples

Galvanic isolation to internal

electronics No

Galvanic isolation to voltage

supply of internal logic Yes

Measured value ranges

Thermocouples Types E, J, K, L, N, T, U

Resistors 48 W

150 W

300 W

600 W

Resistance thermometers Pt 100, Ni 100

Voltage " 80 mV

" 250 mV

" 500 mV

" 1000 mV

Permissible input voltage for

voltage input (destruction

limit)

32 V

Characteristic-curve linea-

rization

for thermocouples T ypes E, J, K, L, N, T, U

for thermal resistors Pt 100 (standard range)

Ni 100 (standard range)

Linearization accuracy in

nominal range for thermo-

couples

"1°C

Connection of signal sensors

For voltage measurement Possible

For resistance measure-

ment:

2-wire connection

4-wire connection Possible

Possible

Input resistance w10 MW

Measured value representa-

tion

SIMATIC S5 12-bit complement of

twos or 11-bit amount

with sign (selectable)

SIMATIC S7 Max. 14-bit complement

of twos (depends on in-

tegration time)

Overrange Approx. 17.5 %

Technical Data

Analog Modules

8-50 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Inputs (continued)

Measuring principle Integrating

Integration/conversion time/

resolution (per channel)

SParameterizable Yes

SIntegration time in ms 2.5 16.7 20 100

SBasic conversion time

incl. integration time and

offset measuring time

in ms or

8 35 42 200

Additional conversion

time for wire-break mon-

itoring in ms

10 10 10 10

SResolution in bits (incl.

overrange) 9+ 12+ 12+ 14+

SI SI SI SI

SNoise suppression for in-

terference frequency f1 in

400 60 50 10

Permissible potential differ-

ence

SAcross inputs Max. "1 V

SInputs to MA (UCM)Max. "1 V

SMA to PE or M Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Error message in the event of

SRange overshoot (over-

range) Yes

SWire break of signal-sen-

sor lines Yes, for Pt 100, Ni 100,

R, " 80 mV, Type E, J,

K, L, N, T, U thermo-

couples (parameteriz-

able)

Noise suppression for

f = n (f1"1 %),

(f1 = interference frequency)

SCommon-mode interfer-

ence (USS t3 V) > 70 dB

SSeries-mode interference

(peak value of interfer-

ence < rated value of in-

put range)

> 40 dB

Inputs (continued)

Crosstalk between inputs

SAt 50 Hz 50 dB

SAt 60 Hz 50 dB

Working error limit (over en-

tire temperature range, in

relation to input range)

S80 mV " 1 %

SFrom 250 to 1000 mV " 0.6 %

SThermocouples " 10 K

SThermal resistors " 5 K

SResistors " 1 %

Basic error limit (working er-

ror limit at 25 _C, in relation

to input range)

S80 mV " 0.6 %

SFrom 250 to 1000 mV " 0.4 %

SThermocouples " 7 K

SThermal resistors " 3 K

SResistors " 0.6 %

T emperature error (in relation

to input range)

" 0.005 %/K

Linearity error (in relation to

input range)

" 0.05 %

Repeatability (in steady-state

condition at 25 _C, in rela-

tion to input range)

" 0.05 %

Cable length

SShielded Max. 100 m

Analog Modules

8-51

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5 Electronics Block ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

The ET 200B-4AI electronics block has the following characteristics:

4 inputs, floating to the supply voltage of the internal logic

Measuring ranges:

– Voltage:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V,

– Current: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 20 mA

Measuring principle: successive approximation

Supply voltage: 24 V DC

Connectable sensors

– Voltage sensors (2-wire connection)

– Current sensors (2-wire connection)

Measured-value range selection via COM ET 200 or STEP 7 or directly

via parameterization telegram (see Chapter 4)

See Figure 8-4 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 8-16 Front Elevation: ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Analog Modules

8-52 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following aspects of the ET 200B-4AI are described below:

In Section you will find on Page

8.5.1 Connecting transducers 8-53

8.5.2 Configuration options 8-61

8.5.3 Setting the operating mode 8-62

8.5.4 Analog-value representation, operation with SIMATIC S5 8-65

8.5.5 Analog-value representation, operation with SIMATIC S7 8-70

8.5.6 Schematic circuit diagram, terminal assignment and techni-

cal data 8-72

List of Subsec-

tions

Analog Modules

8-53

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5.1 Connecting Transducers

You can connect the following to the ET 200B-4AI:

Up to 4 voltage sensors (2-wire connection)

Up to 4 current sensors (2-wire connection)

Mixed configurations with different types of sensor are possible.

2-wire measuring transducers and 4-wire measuring transducers require a

separate voltage supply (see Figures 8-21 and 8-22).

There are two ways of measuring analog signals from current/voltage sen-

sors:

Floating-ground measurement

Ground-referenced measurement

You set the input circuit for floating-ground or ground-referenced measure-

ment by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 (one coding plug per chan-

nel).

In the case of floating-ground measurement (differential measurement), each

signal line has its own signal reference conductor.

Differential measurement is required in the following cases:

If the sensors are connected to different potentials and

If the different signal sources are physically apart.

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM) of the differential

inputs to analog ground (MA) is + 1 V.

The maximum permissible voltage difference between MA and PE must not

exceed 75 V DC/60 V AC.

Avoid ground loops!

Possible Connec-

tions

Input Circuit

Floating-Ground

Measurement

Analog Modules

8-54 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In the case of ground-referenced measurement, all signal reference conduc-

tors in the TB8 are connected to a common reference point (analog ground

MA).

To avoid ground loops, galvanically isolated and ungrounded signal sources

(thermocouples, voltage sources) are required.

Note

Connect MA to PE( ) to enhance noise immunity in the case of ground-ref-

erenced measurement.

The following pages contain a connection example for every connection pos-

sibility and measuring principle. Please note the following rules.

Please note the following rules when connecting measured-value sensors to

the ET 200B-4AI:

The permissible potential difference at the differential input

(x.1<–>x.2, x = 0 to 3) must not exceed +10 V.

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM) between the

differential inputs (x.1<–>x.2, x=0 to 3) and analog ground MA is +1 V.

The maximum permissible isolation voltage between analog ground (MA)

and PE ( ) or between the reference potential of the supply voltage (M)

is 75 V DC/60 V AC.

You must short-circuit the connection terminals of unused voltage inputs

and connect them to MA (coding plug at position “D” for voltage sensors;

position “C” implements the connection to MA for current sensors).

You must short-circuit terminals “K+” and “K–”. For this purpose, set the

coding plug to the “C” position.

Note

Please note the explanation of shielding of analog lines in Sections 3.1

and 3.5.

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

On the Following

Pages

Rules

Analog Modules

8-55

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Voltage sensors for the following measured value ranges can be connected:

" 1.25 V, " 2.5 V, " 5 V, " 10 V

Figures 8-17 and 8-18 show the two methods of connecting voltage sensors.

Figure 8-17 shows the 2-wire connection of voltage sensors (floating-ground

measurement):

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Shield

VCM v"1V

U–+ U–+

Figure 8-17 Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4AI

(Floating-Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v "1 V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA.

Connecting Volt-

age Sensors

Floating-Ground

Measurement

....

x.3 x.1

x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-56 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The 2-wire connection of voltage sensors (ground-referenced measurement)

is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Shield

U–+ U–+

Figure 8-18 Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B-4AI

(Ground-Referenced Measurement)

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

... .

x.3 x.1

x.2x.4 .

Analog Modules

8-57

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Current sensors for the following measured value ranges can be connected:

0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, " 20 mA

Figures 8-19 and 8-20 show the two methods of connecting current sensors.

The 2-wire connection of current sensors (floating-ground measurement) is

shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Shield

VCM v"1V

–+–+

mA mA

Figure 8-19 T wo-W ire Connection of Current Sensors (Floating-Ground Measurement)

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage (VCM v " 1 V) must not

be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA.

Connecting Cur-

rent Sensors

Floating-Ground

Measurement

x.3 x.1

x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-58 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The 2-wire connection of current sensors (ground-referenced measurement) is

shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Shield

–+–+

mA mA

Figure 8-20 Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors (Ground-Referenced

Measurement)

Ground-

Referenced Mea-

surement

....

x.3 x.1

x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-59

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The 2-wire and 4 -wire measuring transducers receive a separate supply volt-

age.

2-wire measuring transducer converts the incoming measured variable into a

current. 4-wire measuring transducers can be used to measure current and

voltage.

The figure below shows how to connect the 2-wire measuring transducer as a

current sensor:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Shield

UCM v"1V

Meas.

transd. Meas.

transd.

L+ ..

++––

Figure 8-21 Connection of 2-Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage of the differential inputs

to analog ground MA is (UCM v "1V).

Avoid ground loops!

Connecting 2-Wire

and 4-Wire Mea-

suring Transduc-

ers

2-Wire Measuring

Transducers

x.3 x.1

x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-60 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The figure below shows how to connect the 4-wire measuring transducer as a

current sensor or voltage sensor:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Shield

UCM v"1V

L+ ..++––

Meas.

transd. Meas.

transd.

Figure 8-22 Connection of 4-Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor or Voltage

Sensor

Note

The maximum permissible common mode voltage of the differential inputs

to analog ground MA is (UCM v "1V).

4-Wire Measuring

Transducer

x.3 x.1

x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-61

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5.2 Configuration Options

The information in this section applies to the type file SI8019BE.200.

The type file contains the possible configurations. The configuration you

choose depends on the wiring of the module.

Table 8-38 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B-4AI with COM

ET 200 Windows or STEP 7.

Table 8-38 lists only the slots for configuring the Input areas (slots 4 to 7).

Slots 1 to 4 have the default value ”004”.

Table 8-38 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200B-4AI

Config-

uration

Terminals used Length1

(in

Meaning

uration Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 (in

words

)

0.1/0.2 1.1/1.2 2.1/2.2 3.0/3.1

words)

4AI 4A start address is assigned for the en-

tire module, addresses for 4 words

are reserved.

(= module addressing)

4 x 1AI 4A separate start address can be as-

signed for each channel

3 x 1AI 3signed for each channel.

(

= sin

le-channel addressin

2 x 1AI 2

single channel

addressing)

1 x 1AI 1

1Length of user data

= Connection of measuring lines

Diagnostics messages and diagnostics data (slave diagnostics) are returned

only for the configured channels.

Type File

Configuration

Diagnostics

Analog Modules

8-62 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5.3 Setting the Operating Mode

You set the operating mode of the ET 200B-4AI electronics block

by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 terminal block

and

by means of the COM ET 200 or STEP7 parameterization software.

The coding plugs of the TB8 enable you to set the input circuit of the TB8

for analog value measurement of each individual channel of the

ET 200B-4AI in accordance with the measured-value sensor connected and

the desired mode of measurement.

The possible settings of the coding plugs are: ”A”, ”B”, ”C” and ”D”.

For details of the relationships between the settings of the coding plugs and

the mode of measurement and the measured-value sensors, see Section 8.5.1.

Section 3.1 describes how to change the settings of the coding plugs.

Some parameters of the ET 200B-4AI listed on the following pages apply

only to individual channels. Table 8-39 lists the assignment of TB8 terminals

to channels.

Table 8-39 Assignment of Terminals to Channels

Channel Terminals

Channel 0 Terminals 0.1/0.2

Channel 1 Terminals 1.1/1.2

Channel 2 Terminals 2.1/2.2

Channel 3 Terminals 3.1/3.2

Setting the Operat-

ing Mode

Coding Plugs

Channel

Analog Modules

8-63

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-40 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B-4AI

with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7.

You can set these parameters for the ET 200B-4AI if you use the type file

SI8019BE.200.

Table 8-40 Parameters for ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

Parameter Explanation Value Range

Diagnostics alarm Diagnostics alarm enable for module Disable

Enable

Limit-value alarm Limit-value alarm enable for module Disable

Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa-

rately for each channel

Disable

Diagnostics enable for channel 1 rately for each channel Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel 2

Diagnostics enable for channel 3

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 0 Wire break monitoring enabled sepa-

rately for each channel group for mea-

i 4 20 A

Disable

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 1

suring range 4 ... 20 mA

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 2

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 3

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel 0 You can set the measurement type and

range separately for each channel

For voltage measurement:  10 V

Channel not activated

Measuring type and range for channel 1



 5 V

 2.5 V

125V

Measuring type and range for channel 2

For current measurement:

 1.25 V

 20 mA

Measuring type and range for channel 3



0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

Representation of measured values Sets representation of the analog mea-

sured values for module SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

Measured value representation: S5 Sets data format for analog value repre-

sentation, SIMATIC S5 Complement of twos

Amount with sign

Binary

Parameters

Analog Modules

8-64 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-40 Parameters for ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0), continued

Parameter Value RangeExplanation

Upper limit value for channel 0 Upper and lower limit values for each

channel 0

*32768 ... 32767

Lower limit value for channel 0 0

*32768 ... 32767

Upper limit value for channel 2 0

*32768 ... 32767

Lower limit value for channel 2 0

*32768 ... 32767

: Default

Analog Modules

8-65

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5.4 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S5

If you operate the ET 200B-4AI with SIMATIC S5, you can utilize the ana-

log value representation of SIMATIC S7 (higher measured-value resolution:

max. 14 bits + sign). See Section 8.5.5 for the measured-value tables for ana-

log value representation in SIMATIC S7.

Analog values can be represented in three data formats with the

ET 200B-4AI:

12-bit complement of twos representation (range: –2048 to +2047 units)

11-bit amount and 1-bit sign (range: –2048 to +2047 units)

12-bit binary number (range: 0 to 4095 units)

The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B-4AI:

Table 8-41 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

High Byte Low Byte

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Analog value

representation SI 211 210 29282726252423222120X X OV

Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have no significance for the amount of the measured

value. See Table 8-42 for a detailed description of these bits.

Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have the following meaning in the bit pattern of the

analog input value:

Table 8-42 Description of the Bits (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

Bit Meaning Signal Status Meaning of the Signal Status

OV Overflow bit 1 Overrange 1

SI Sign 0“+” sign

1“–” sign

X Irrelevant – –

1In the event of overflow at one measuring point, the overflow bits of the other channels

remain unaffected; this means the values of the other channels are correct and can be

evaluated.

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S7

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S5

Supplementary

Bits

Analog Modules

8-66 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The tables below show the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for the measuring ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V.

The ET 200B-4AI module (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0) does not have an over-

range.

Table 8-43 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measur-

ing Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V; Complement of Twos)

Units Measured Value in V Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range

1.25V 2.5V 5V 10V 1514131211109876543210

2047 1.2494 2.4988 4.9976 9.9951 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

2046 1.2488 2.4975 4.9951 9.9902 0 011111111110000

: : : : : :

10.0006 0.0012 0.0024 0.0049 0 000000000001000 Nomina

l range

0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0 000000000000000 l range

–1 –0.0006 –0.0012 –0.0024 –0.0049 1 111111111111000

: : : : : : :

–2047 –1.2494 –2.4988 –4.9976 –9.9951 1 100000000001000

–2048 –1.2500 –2.5000 –5.0000 –10.000 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Table 8-44 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measur-

ing Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V; Amount and Sign)

Units Measured Value in V SI Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range

1.25V 2.5V 5V 10V 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2047 1.2494 2.4988 4.9976 9.9951 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

2046 1.2488 2.4975 4.9951 9.9902 0 0 11111111110000

: : : : : :

10.0006 0.0012 0.0024 0.0049 0 0 00000000001000 No-

minal

0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0 0 00000000000000

minal

range

–1 –0.0006 –0.0012 –0.0024 –0.0049 1 0 00000000001000

: : : : : :

–2047 –1.2494 –2.4988 –4.9976 –9.9951 1 0 11111111111000

–2048 –1.2500 –2.5000 –5.0000 –10.000 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Voltage Measuring

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-67

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-45 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measur-

ing Ranges:  1.25 V,  2.5 V,  5 V,  10 V; Binary)

Units Measured Value in V Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range

1.25V 2.5V 5V 10V 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4095 1.2494 2.4988 4.9976 9.9951 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

4094 1.2488 2.4975 4.9951 9.9902 0 111111111110000

: : : : : :

2049 0.0006 0.0012 0.0024 0.0049 0 100000000001000 Nomin

2048 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0 100000000000000

range

2047 –0.0006 –0.0012 –0.0024 –0.0049 0 011111111111000

: : : : : : :

1–1.2494 –2.4988 –4.9976 –9.9951 0 000000000001000

0–1.2500 –2.5000 –5.0000 –10.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

The tables below show the assignments of analog to digitized measured val-

ues for the measuring ranges: 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA,  20 mA.

The ET 200B-4AI module (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0) does not have an over-

range.

Table 8-46 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI

(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measuring Range:  20 mA; Complement

of Twos)

Units Mea-

sured

Value in

Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range

20 mA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2047 19.9902 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

2046 19.9804 0 011111111110000

: : :

10.00976 0 000000000001000 Nomina

l range

0 0.0000 0 000000000000000 l range

–1 –0.00976 1 111111111111000

: : :

–2047 –19.9902 1 100000000001000

–2048 –20.0000 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Current Measuring

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-68 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-47 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI

(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measuring Range:  20 mA;

Amount and Sign)

Units Mea-

sured

Value in

SI Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range

20 mA 15 14131211109876543210

2047 19.9902 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

2046 19.9804 0 0 11111111110000

: : :

10.00976 0 0 00000000001000 No-

minal

0 0.0000 0 0 00000000000000

minal

range

–1 –0.00976 1 0 00000000001000

: : :

–2047 –19.9902 1 0 11111111111000

–2048 –20.0000 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Table 8-48 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI

(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measuring Range:  20 mA; Binary)

Units Mea-

sured

Value in

Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range

20 mA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4095 19.9902 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

4094 19.9804 0 111111111110000

: : :

2049 0.00976 0 100000000001000 Nomina

l range

2048 0.0000 0 100000000000000 l range

2047 –0.00976 0 011111111111000

: : :

1–19.9902 0 000000000001000

0–20.0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Analog Modules

8-69

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-49 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI

(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measuring Range: 0 ... 20 mA)

Units Measured

Value in

Digitized Measured Value1X X OV Range

0 to 20 mA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4095 19.9951 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

4094 19.9902 0 111111111110000 Nomina

l range

: : : l range

1 0.00488 0 000000000001000

00.00000 0 000000000000001

1Same representation for two’s complement, amount and sign, and binary

Table 8-50 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI

(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0; Measuring Range: 4 ... 20 mA)

Units Measured

Value in

Digitized Measured Value1X X OV Range

4 to 20 mA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2559 19.992 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

2048 16.000 0 100000000000000

512 4.000 0 001000000000000 No-

minal

511 3.992 0 000111111111000

minal

range

384 3.000 0 000110000000000

383 2.992 0 000101111111000

00.000 0 000000000000001

1Same representation for two’s complement, amount and sign, and binary

The measuring range 4 to 20 mA is resolved to 2048 units in the interval 512

to 2560. For a representation in the range 0 to 2048 units, 512 units must be

subtracted per software.

Note

Analog Modules

8-70 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5.5 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S7

If you operate the ET 200B-4AI with SIMATIC S7 the analog values are rep-

resented in complements of twos.

The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B-4AI:

Table 8-51 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC S7 and ET 200B-4AI

High Byte Low Byte

Bit Number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Analog Value

Representation SI 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

Bit 15 has no significance for the amount of the measured value. It merely

represents the sign.

The table below shows the representation of the digitized measuring values

of the ET 200B-4AI for the measuring ranges: " 1.25 V, " 2.5 V, " 5 V

and " 10 V.

Table 8-52 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI (Measuring Ranges: " 1.25 V,

" 2.5 V, " 5 V and " 10 V)

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Units

Range

" 1.25 V

Range

" 2.5V

Range

" 5 V

Range

" 10 V Deci-

mal Hexade-

cimal Range

w 1.4699 w 2.9398 w 5.8796 w 11.759 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1.46986 2.9397 5.8794 11.7589 32511 7EFFH

: : : : : : Overrange

1.25005 2.5001 5.0002 10.0004 27649 6C01H

1.25 2.50 5.00 10.00 27648 6C00H

0.9375 1.875 3.75 7.50 20736 5100H

: : : : : : Nominal range

– 0.9375 – 1.875 – 3.75 – 7.50 –20736 AF00H

– 1.25 – 2.50 – 5.00 – 10.00 –27648 9400 H

– 1.25005 – 2.5001 – 5.0002 – 10.0004 –27649 93FFH

: : : : : : Underrange

– 1.4699 – 2.9398 – 5.8796 – 11.759 –32512 8100H

v– 1.47 v– 2.94 v– 5.88 v– 11.76 –32768 8000HUnderrun

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S7

Voltage Measuring

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-71

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The two tables below show the representation of the digitized measuring val-

ues of the ET 200B-4AI for the measuring ranges: " 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA and

4 ... 20 mA.

T able 8-53 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI (Mea-

suring Range: " 20 mA)

Measuring Range

"20 mA

Units

Range

" 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal

ange

w 23.5185 32767 7FFFHOverflow

23.518 32511 7EFFH

: : : Overrange

20.0007 27649 6C01H

20.000 27648 6C00H

15.000 20736 5100H

: : : Nominal range

– 15.000 –20736 AF00H

– 20.000 –27648 9400 H

– 20.0007 –27649 93FFH

: : : Underrange

– 23.5185 –32512 8100H

v– 23.519 –32768 8000HUnderrun

T able 8-54 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AI (Mea-

suring Ranges: 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA)

Measuring

Range

Measuring

Range

Units

Range

From 0

to 20 mA From 4

to 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal

ange

w 23.5185 w 22.815 32767 7FFFHOverflow

23.518 22.814 32511 7EFFH

: : : : Overrange

20.0007 20.0006 27649 6C01H

20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H

15.000 16.000 20736 5100H

Nominal range

: : : :

range

0.000 4.000 0 0H

-0.0007 3.9995 –1 FFFFH

: : : : Underrange

–3.5185 1.1852 –4864 ED00H

v–3.5192 v1.1846 –32768 8000HUnderrun

Current Measuring

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-72 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.5.6 Block Diagram, Terminal Assignment and Technical Data

Simplified representation of potential for the ET 200B-4AI and TB8:

24 V

supply

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-4AI

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

Analog TB8

L+

Logic

Channel

0Channel

Coding panels

K+

K-

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

2.3 2.4

2.1 2.2

3.3 3.4

3.1 3.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

Channel

2Channel

3Analog

ground

x.1 x.4x.2 4x

5 V 24 V

5 V

15V

Station

number

selection

PROFIBUS-DP

Connection

PROFIBUS-

switch

Figure 8-23 Block Diagram: ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF10-0XB0) and TB8

Schematic Circuit

Diagram

Analog Modules

8-73

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below contains the terminal assignments of the TB8 for

ET 200B-4AI:

Table 8-55 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B-4AI

(6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

Terminal num-

bering TB8

Terminal Assignment

K+ Unassigned

K– Unassigned

x.1 Measuring line (+)

x.2 Measuring line (–)

x.3 Unassigned

x.4 Connection, resistance measurement

MAAnalog ground (MA)

L+ Voltage supply, internal logic

M Voltage supply, internal logic

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Note

Certain additional settings must be made for the input circuit by means of

the coding plugs of the TB8. The settings of the coding plugs are illustrated

in Figures 8-17 to 8-22.

Terminal Assign-

ment

Analog Modules

8-74 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of the ET200B-4AI electronics block are listed in the

table below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to the

SINEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Typically 1.8 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 550 g (19.25 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60

Diagnostics functions, alarms

Voltage monitoring Green ”RUN” LED

Bus monitoring, SINEC

L2-DP Red ”BF” LED

Group diagnostics Red ”DIA” LED, parame-

terizable

Alarms

Limit-value alarm Yes, parameterizable

channels 0 and 2

Diagnostics alarm Yes, parameterizable

Supply voltage for inputs and internal logic

Supply voltage (L+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 ... 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5 s 35 V

Current consumption from

L+

Logic 70 mA

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum possible

baud rate is 1500 kbaud.

Inputs

Number of inputs 4

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronics No

Galvanic isolation to volt-

age supply of internal logic Yes

Measured value ranges

Voltage sensors " 1.25 V

" 2.5 V

" 5V

" 10 V

Current sensors 0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

" 20 mA

Connection of signal sensors

For voltage measure-

ment Possible

(2-wire connection)

For current measure-

ment Possible

(2-wire connection)

For measuring trans-

ducer Possible, 2-wire- and

4-wire measuring trans-

ducers

Input resistance

Voltage measurement w100 KW

Current measurement 125 W

Measured value represen-

tation

SIMATIC S5 12-bit complement of twos

or 11-bit amount with sign

or 12-bit binary (select-

able)

SIMATIC S7 Max. 14-bit complement

of twos (depends on in-

tegration time)

Measuring principle Successive approximation

Conversion time Max. 100 ms

Cycle time of module Approx. 5 ms

Permissible potential dif-

ference

Across inputs of a

channel Max. " 10 V

Inputs to MA (UCM)Max. " 1 V

MA to PE or M Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Error message in the event of

Range overshoot

(nominal range) Yes

Wire break of signal-

sensor lines Only for measuring range

4 ... 20 mA

Technical Data

Analog Modules

8-75

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Inputs (continued)

Noise suppression for f = n

x (50/60 Hz " 1%) n =

1, 2, ...

Common-mode inter-

ference (USS t1 V) min. 70 dB

Basic error limit

Voltage ranges 0.15 %

Current range 0.20 %

Working error limit (0 ...

60 °C)

Voltage ranges 0.32 %

Current range 0.41 %

Permissible input voltage

(destruction limit) Max. " 30 V (static) or

" 75 V (pulse for max.

1ms and 1:20 sampling)

Permissible input current

(destruction limit) Max. 24 mA

Cable length

Shielded Max. 100 m

Analog Modules

8-76 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6 Electronics Block ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

The ET 200B-4AO electronics block has the following characteristics:

4 inputs, floating to the supply voltage of the internal logic

Output ranges:

– Voltage output:  10 V, 0 ... 10 V

– Current output:  20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA

Supply voltage: 24 V DC

Loads connectable in

– 4-wire connection

– 2-wire connection

Output range selection via COM ET 200 or STEP 7 or directly via para-

meterization telegram (see Chapter 4)

See Figure 8-4 for the precise dimensions.

Figure 8-24 Front Elevation: ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

Characteristics

Dimensional Draw-

ing

Analog Modules

8-77

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following aspects of the ET 200B-4AO are described below:

In Section you will find on Page

8.6.1 Connecting loads 8-78

8.6.2 Configuration options 8-82

8.6.3 Setting the operating mode 8-83

8.6.4 Analog-value representation, operation with SIMATIC S5 8-85

8.6.5 Analog-value representation, operation with SIMATIC S7 8-87

8.6.6 Block diagram, pin assignment and technical data 8-89

List of Subsec-

tions

Analog Modules

8-78 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6.1 Connecting Loads

There are two methods of connecting loads to the ET 200B-4AO:

4-wire connection of loads

2-wire connection of loads

The following pages contain a connection example for every connection pos-

sibility. Please note the following rules.

Please note the following rules when connecting loads to the ET 200B-4AO:

The output terminals x.2 (x = 0 to 3) have a fixed connection to analog

ground (MA).

If non-floating loads are connected to a common reference potential,

please ensure minimum potential differences. Failure to do so can lead to

undesired transient currents across the output module.

You are recommended to connect floating-ground loads which are float-

ing with reference to each other. In such cases, connect analog ground

(MA) with PE ( ) to enhance noise immunity.

The connection terminals of unused outputs are left open.

You must short-circuit terminals “K+” and “K–”. For this purpose, set the

coding plug to the “C” position.

!Caution

If the supply voltage is below the lower tolerance limit, the output analog

values can deviate from the specified values.

Note

Please note the explanation of shielding of analog lines in Sections 3.1

and 3.5.

Possible Connec-

tions

On the Following

Pages

Rules

Analog Modules

8-79

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The voltage on the load is re-adjusted via two high-resistance sensor lines per

channel (S+, S– at terminals x.3 and x.4). In this way, voltage drops of up to

3 V per line can be re-adjusted.

Please ensure that the sensor lines are connected directly to the load.

4-wire connection of loads for voltage output is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

AAC

Shield

...

S+ S–

Figure 8-25 4-Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output

4-Wire Connection

of Loads (Voltage

Output)

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-80 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The sensor lines are not required for 2-wire connection. Two-wire connection

is possible for voltage output if the line resistance of the signal lines is negli-

gible compared to the load resistance.

2-wire connection of loads for voltage output is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

BBC

Shield

RLRL

Figure 8-26 2-Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output

2-Wire Connec-

tion of Loads

(Voltage Output)

. .. .

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-81

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Two-wire connection of loads for current output is shown below:

K+

K–

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

+ 24V

Mexternal

TB8

Max.

75 V DC/

60 V AC

Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

AAC

Shield

RLRL

Figure 8-27 2-Wire Connection of Loads for Current Output

Two-Wire Connec-

tion of Loads

(Current Output)

....

x.3 x.1 x.2 x.4

Analog Modules

8-82 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6.2 Configuration Options

The information in this section applies to the type file SI8018BE.200.

The type file contains the possible configurations. The configuration you

choose depends on the wiring of the module.

Table 8-56 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B-4AO with

COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7.

Table 8-56 lists only the slots for configuring the output areas (slots 4 to 7).

Slots 1 to 3 have the default value ”004”.

Table 8-56 Possible Configurations for the Output Areas of ET 200B-4AO

Config-

uration

Terminals used Length1

(in

Meaning

uration Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 (in

words

)

0.1/

0.2 0.3/

0.4 1.1/

1.2 1.3/

1.4 2.1/

2.2 2.3/

2.4 3.0/

3.1 3.3/

3.4

words)

4AO o o o o 4 A start address is as-

signed for the entire

module, addresses

for 4 are reserved.

(= module addres-

sing)

4 x 1AO o o o o 4 A separate start ad-

dress can be assigned

3 x 1AO o o o 3 dress can be assigned

for each channel.

2 x 1AO o o 2

for

each

channel

(= single-channel ad-

dressing)

1 x 1AO o 1 dressing)

1Length of user data

= Connection of load

o = Connection of sensor lines for voltage measurement

Diagnostics messages and diagnostics data (slave diagnostics) are returned

only for the configured channels.

Type File

Configuration

Diagnostics

Analog Modules

8-83

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6.3 Setting the Operating Mode

You set the operating mode of the ET 200B-4AO electronics block

by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 terminal block

and

by means of the COM ET 200 or STEP7 parameterization software.

The coding plugs of the TB8 enable you to set the output circuit for analog

value output of each individual channel of the ET 200B-4AO.

The possible settings of the coding plugs are: ”A”, ”B”, ”C” and ”D”.

For details of the relationships between the settings of the coding plugs and

the output mode or load, see Section 8.6.1. Section 3.1 describes how to

change the settings of the coding plugs.

Some parameters of the ET 200B-4AO listed on the following pages apply

only to individual channels. Table 8-57 lists the assignment of TB8 terminals

to channels.

Table 8-57 Assignment of Terminals to Channels

Channel Terminals

Channel 0 Terminals 0.1/0.2

Channel 1 Terminals 1.1/1.2

Channel 3 Terminals 2.1/2.2

Channel 4 Terminals 3.1/3.2

Setting the Operat-

ing Mode

Coding Plugs

Channel

Analog Modules

8-84 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-58 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B-4AO

with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7.

You can set these parameters for the ET 200B-4AO if you use the type file

SI8018BE.200.

Table 8-58 Parameters for ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

Parameter Explanation Explanation

Diagnostics alarm Diagnostics alarm enable for module Disable

Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa-

rately for each channel

Disable

Diagnostics enable for channel 1 rately for each channel Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel 2

Diagnostics enable for channel 3

Output value and range for channel 0 Type and range of output defined sepa-

rately for each channel

Output value and range for channel 1 For voltage output: " 10 V

0 ... 10 V

Output value and range for channel 2 For current output: " 20 mA

020mA

Output value and range for channel 3

...

4 ... 20 mA

Representation of output values Sets representation of the analog values

for module SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

Type of dummy value for channel 0 Defines the dummy value output for

each channel in the event of commu

Parameterizable

Type of dummy value for channel 1 each channel in the event of commu-

nication interru

tion Last value

Type of dummy value for channel 2

nication

interruption

Type of dummy value for channel 3

Dummy value for channel 0 Sets dummy value for each channel 0

Dummy value for channel 1 *32786 ... 32767

Dummy value for channel 2

Dummy value for channel 3

: Default

Parameters

Analog Modules

8-85

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6.4 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S5

If you operate the ET 200B-4AO with SIMATIC S5, you can utilize the ana-

log value representation of SIMATIC S7. See Section 8.6.5 for the measured-

value tables for analog value representation in SIMATIC S7.

Analog values are represented in complements of twos with the

ET 200B-4AO.

The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B-4AO:

Table 8-59 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

High Byte Low Byte

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Analog value

representation SI 210 29282726252423222120X X X X

Bits 0 ... 3 and 15 have no significance for the amount of the measured value.

See Table 8-60 for a detailed description of these bits.

Bits 0 ... 3 and 15 have the following meaning in the bit pattern of the analog

output value:

Table 8-60 Description of the Bits (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

Bit Meaning Signal Status Meaning of the Signal Status

SI Sign 0“+” sign

1“–” sign

X Irrelevant – –

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S7

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S5

Supplementary

Bits

Analog Modules

8-86 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized output signals

for the value ranges:  10 V, 0 ... 10 V,  20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA.

Table 8-61 Analog Output Signals of the ET 200B-4AO (Value Ranges:  10 V, 0 ... 10 V,  20 mA,

0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA; Complement of Twos)

Units Output Value in mV Digitized Output Value Range

0 ... 20

mA 4 ... 20

20

mA 0 ... 10

10V 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

1249 23.52 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Over-

range

1204 23.52 : 23.52 11.758 11.758 0 10010110100 range

: : : : : : :

1025 20.0195 20.016 20.2 10.0098 10.0098 0 10000000001

1024 20.0 20.0 20.0 10.00 10.00 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1023 19.98 19.98 19.98 9.99 9.990 0 01111111111

512 10.0 12.0 10.0 5.00 5.000 0 01000000000

256 5.0 8.00 5.0 2.50 2.500 0 00100000000

10.0195 4.015 0.02 0.0098 0.0098 0 00000000000Nominal

range

0 0.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.000 0 00000000000 range

–1 0.0 3.984 –0.02 0.0 –0.0098 1 11111111111

–256 0.0 0.0 –05.0 0.0 –2.500 1 11100000000

–512 0.0 0.0 –10.0 0.0 –5.000 1 11000000000

–1024 0.0 0.0 –20.00 0.0 –10.000 1 10000000000

–1025 0.0 0.0 –20.02 0.0 –10.009 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-

range

: : : : : : : range

–1204 0.0 0.0 –23.52 0.0 –11.758 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

Voltage and Cur-

rent Output

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-87

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6.5 Analog Value Representation, Operation with SIMATIC S7

Analog values are represented in complements of twos with the

ET 200B-4AO for SIMATIC S7.

The table below shows the analog value representation ET 200B-4AO:

Table 8-62 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC S7 and ET 200B-4AO

High Byte Low Byte

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Analog value

representation SI 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

Bit 15 has no significance for the amount of the output value. It merely repre-

sents the sign.

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized output signals

for the value ranges: " 10 V, 0 ... 10 V.

Table 8-63 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AO (Output Ranges: 0 to 10 V and

" 10 V)

Output Range

0to10V

Output Range

"10 V

Units

0 to 10 V " 10 V Decimal Hexa-

decimal Range

0 0 w32512 w7F00HOverflow

11.7589 11.7589 32511 7EFFH

: : : : Overrange

10.0004 10.0004 27649 6C01H

10.0000 10.0000 27648 6C00H

: : : :

0 0 0 0H

0 : :

Nominal range

:– 6912 E500H

range

– 6913 E4FFH

: :

– 10.0000 – 27648 9400 H

10.0004 – 27649 93FFH

: : : Underrange

– 11.7593 – 32512 8100H

0v– 32513 v80FFHUnderrun

Analog Value Rep-

resentation, SI-

MATIC S7

Voltage Output

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-88 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized output signals

for the value ranges: " 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA.

Table 8-64 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B-4AO (Output Ranges: " 20 mA, 0 to

20 mA and 4 to 20 mA)

Output

Range "20

Output

Range

Output

Range

Units Range

Range " 20

mA Range

0 to 20 mA Range

4 to 20 mA Decimal Hexade-

cimal

0 0 0 w32512 w7F00HOverflow

23.518 23.518 22.81 32511 7EFFH

: : : : : Overrange

20.0007 20.0007 20.006 27649 6C01H

20.000 20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H

: : : :

0 0 4.000 0 0H

0 : : :

Nominal range

: 0 – 6912 E500H

range

0– 6913 E4FFH

: :

– 20.000 – 27648 9400H

– 27649 93FFH

: : : Underrange

– 23.519 – 32512 8100H

0v– 32513 v80FFHUnderrun

Current Output

Ranges

Analog Modules

8-89

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

8.6.6 Block Diagram, Terminal Assignment and Technical Data

Simplified representation of potential for the ET 200B-4AO and TB8:

24 V

supply

X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block

ET 200B-4AO

Suppr. logic

STOP/RUN

switch

Analog TB8

L+

5 V

Logic

24 V

Channel

0Channel

Coding panels

K+

K-

0.3 0.4

0.1 0.2

1.3 1.4

1.1 1.2

2.3 2.4

2.1 2.2

3.3 3.4

3.1 3.2

MAL+

MAM

L+

Channel

2Channel

3Analog

ground

5 V

18V

x.3 x.4x.1x.2

Station

number

selection

PROFIBUS-DP

Connection

PROFIBUS-DP

Figure 8-28 Block Diagram: ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0) and TB8

Block Diagram

Analog Modules

8-90 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below contains the terminal assignments of the TB8 for

ET 200B-4AO, depending on the circuit type used.

Table 8-65 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B-4AO

(6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

Terminal num-

bering TB8

Terminal 4-Wire Connection 2-Wire Connection

K+ Unassigned

K– Unassigned

x.1 Analog output “voltage” (+) Analog output “current or

voltage” (+)

x.2 Analog output “voltage”” (–) Analog output “current or

voltage” (–)

x.3 Sensor line (S+) connected to x.1

x.4 Sensor line (S–) connected to x.2

MAAnalog ground (MA)

L+ Voltage supply for internal logic

M Voltage supply for internal logic

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Note

You must make additional settings for the input circuits of the TB8 via cod-

ing plugs. See Figures 8-25 and 8-27 for the necessary settings of the coding

plugs.

Terminal Assign-

ment

Analog Modules

8-91

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The technical data of the ET200B-4AO electronics block are listed in the

table below.

Technical specifications

Baud rates* 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5/500/

1500/3000/6000/

12000 kbaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

Galvanic isolation to SI-

NEC L2-DP bus Yes

Power losses Typically 2.4 W

Weight (EB and TB) Approx. 550 g (19.25 oz.)

Dimensions (EB and TB:

W x H x D) 160 x 130 x 60 mm

(6.24 x 5.07 x 2.34 in.)

Diagnostics functions, alarms

Voltage monitoring Green “RUN” LED

Bus monitoring SINEC

L2-DP Red “BF” LED

Group diagnostics Red “DIA” LED, parame-

terizable

Diagnostics alarm Yes, parameterizable

Supply voltage for outputs and internal logic

Supply voltage (L+)

Rated value 24 V DC

Permissible range 18.5 to 30.2 V

Value for t < 0.5s 35 V

Current consumption from

L+

Logic Max. 200 mA

Outputs

Number of outputs 4

Galvanic isolation to inter-

nal electronic circuits No

Galvanic isolation to volt-

age supply of internal logic Yes

Output ranges

Voltage range  10 V, 0 to 10 V

Current ranges  20 mA, 0 to 20 mA,

4 to 20 mA

Connection type 2- or 4-wire connection

Load resistance

Voltage output Min. 3.3 kW

Load impedance for

current output Max. 300 W

Capacitive load Max. 1 mF

Inductive load Max. 1 mH

Outputs, continued

Data input format 11-bit complement of twos

Overrange Approx. 17.5 %

Conversion time Approx. 1 ms

Settling time

For resistive load 0.1 ms

For capacitive load 3.3 ms

For inductive load 0.5 ms

Permissible potential dif-

ference

MA to PE or M Max. 75 V DC/60 V AC

Crosstalk between outputs 40 dB

Working error limit (over

entire temperature range in

relation to output range)

Voltage  0.5 %

Current  1 %

Basic error limit (working

error limit at 25°C (77 °F)

in relation to output range)

Voltage  0.2 %

Current  0.3 %

Temperature error (in rela-

tion to output range)

 0.02 %/K

Linearity error (in relation

to output range)

 0.05 %

Repeatability (in steady-

state condition at 25°C (77

°F), in relation to output

range)

 0.05 %

Output ripple (in relation

to output range)

 0.05 %

Voltage output

Short-circuit protec-

tion Yes, max. 1 output simul-

taneously

Short-circuit current Max. 25 mA

Current output

Idle voltage Max. 18 V

Cable length

Shielded Max. 100 m (328 ft.)

* In operation with the IM 308-B, the maximum possible

baud rate is 1500 kbaud.

Technical Data

Analog Modules

8-92 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Analog Modules

A-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Type Files and GSD Files

In order to operate an ET 200B module you require

a type file for operation with COM ET 200 V4.x, COM ET 200 Windows

or STEP 7

a GSD file for operation with PROFIBUS-DP masters from Siemens or

other vendors.

Section Describes Page

A.1 Type files of the ET 200B modules A-2

A.2 GSD files of the ET 200B modules A-4

In this Chapter

A-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

A.1 Type Files of the ET 200B Modules

COM ET 200 V4.x, COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 require a type file

for each ET 200B module (DP slave). The type file contains the definitions

of all the module’s characteristics.

Before you start working with the software, make sure that the type file of

the ET 200B module is installed in a type-file directory recognized by the

software.

All the type files needed to start ET 200B with COM ET 200 V4.x, COM

ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 are available in the Interface Center. The mo-

dem number to dial is: +49 (0911) 737972

The designations of the type files for the digital ET 200B modules are as fol-

lows:

Table A-1 Designations of Type Files for Digital Modules

Station Type Type File for

COM ET 200 V4.x Type File for

COM ET 200 Windows

and STEP 71

B-16DI DP SI0001TE.200 SI0001AX.200

B-32DI DP SI0004TE.200 SI0004AX.200

B-32DI.2 DP SI000CTE.200 SI000CAX.200

B-16DO DP SI0002TE.200 SI0002AE.200

B-16DO/2A DP SI0005TE.200 SI0005AE.200

B-32DO DP SI000DTE.200 SI000DAE.200

B-8DI/8DO DP SI000BTE.200 SI000BAE.200

B-8DI/8DO HWA DP SI0010TE.200 SI0010AE.200

B-16DI/16DO DP SI000ATE.200 SI000AAE.200

B-24DI/8DO DP SI000FTE.200 SI000FAE.200

B-24DI/8DO.2 DP SI000ETE.200 SI000EAE.200

B-16DI-AC DP SI0019TE.200 SI0019TX.200

B-16DO-AC DP SI001ATE.200 SI001ATX.200

B-16RO-AC DP SI001CTE.200 SI001CTX.200

B-8DI/8RO-AC DP SI001DTE.200 SI001DTX.200

B-8RO DP SI0003TE.200 SI0003AX.200

1These type files are valid for the digital modules described in this manual (order num-

bers are listed in Appendix F), even if the type files contain some order numbers of

fully compatible predecessor modules.

Type File

Provision of Type

Files

Digital Modules

Type Files and GSD Files

A-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The designations of the type files for the analog ET 200B modules are as fol-

lows:

Table A-2 Designations of Type Files for Analog Modules

Station Type

(in COM ET 200) Type File for

COM ET 200 V4.x Type File for

COM ET 200 Windows

and STEP 7

B-4/8AI DP SI801ATE.200 SI801AAE.200

B-4AI DP SI8019TE.200 SI8019AE.200

B-4AO DP SI8018TE.200 SI8018AE.200

B-4/8AI-2 DP – SI801ABE.200

B-4AI-2 DP – SI8019BE.200

B-4AO-2 DP – SI8018BE.200

There are two type-file version for configuring analog modules with

COM ET 200 Windows (SIxxxxAE.200 and SIxxxxBE.200).

You can use either version. The SIxxxxBE.200 version supports additional

functions for analog modules (alarms, dummy-value output for 4AO) and

additional measuring ranges.

The SIxxxxBE.200 version now also supports single-channel addressing.

The manuals on the software contain notes on installation.

Note

The type files listed in Tables A-1 and A-2 are valid for the modules de-

scribed in this manual (order numbers are listed in Appendix F), even if the

type files contain the order numbers of predecessor modules!

Analog Modules

SIxxxxBE.200

Installation

Type Files and GSD Files

A-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

A.2 GSD Files of the ET 200B Modules

You need a device master data file, or GSD file to EN 50170, Part 3 to con-

nect ET 200B modules to DP masters which cannot process the type files

(e.g. DP masters from other vendors. The GSD file contains the definitions of

all slave-specific characteristics.

All GSD files for ET 200B are available on a diskette which you can order,

quoting the following order number:

Diskette with GSD files: 6ES7 190-1AA00-0AA0

You can also fetch the GSD files by modem from the Interface Center: the

modem number to dial is:

Tel.: +49 (0911) 737972

In case the GSD file is not available, the major characteristics of the

ET 200B modules are listed in the tables below. This information will suf fice

to start ET 200B with a CP 5431, for example.

GSD File

Provision of GSD

Files

Major Characteris-

tics

Type Files and GSD Files

A-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules: 16DI, 32DI,

32DI 0.2 ms, 16DO and 16DO/2A.

Table A-3 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-16DI, ET 200B-32DI, ET 200B-32DI

0.2ms, ET 200B-16DO, ET 200B-16DO/2A

Characteristic DP Keyword to

EN 50170, Part 3 16DI 32DI 32DI

0.2ms 16DO 16DO/2A

Manufacturer ID Ident_Number 0001H0004H000CH0002H0005H

Supports 9.6 kbaud 9.6_supp Yes

Supports 19.2 kbaud 19.2_supp Yes

Supports 93.75 kbaud 93.75_supp Yes

Supports 187.5 kbaud 187.5_supp Yes

Supports 500 kbaud 500_supp Yes

Supports 1.5 Mbaud 1.5M_supp Yes

Supports 3 Mbaud 3M_supp Yes

Supports 6 Mbaud 6M_supp Yes

Supports 12 Mbaud 12M_supp Yes

Supports FREEZE control

command Freeze_Mode_supp Yes Yes Yes – –

Supports SYNC control

command Sync_Mode_supp – – – Yes Yes

Supports autobaud search Auto_Baud_supp Yes

Software-settable station

number Set_Slave_Add_supp No

Length of user-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data_Len 5 Byte

User-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H ,00H

Modular station Modular_Station No

16DI, 32DI, 16DO

and 16DO/2A

Type Files and GSD Files

A-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules: 32DO, 8RO,

8DI/8DO and 8DI/8DO HWA.

Table A-4 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-32DO, ET 200B-8RO,

ET 200B-8DI/8DO, ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA

Characteristic DP Keyword to

EN 50170, Part 3 32DO 8RO 8DI/8DO 8DI/8DO

HWA

Manufacturer ID Ident_Number 000DH0003H000BH0010H

Supports 9.6 kbaud 9.6_supp Yes

Supports 19.2 kbaud 19.2_supp Yes

Supports 93.75 kbaud 93.75_supp Yes

Supports 187.5 kbaud 187.5_supp Yes

Supports 500 kbaud 500_supp Yes

Supports 1.5 Mbaud 1.5M_supp Yes

Supports 3 Mbaud 3M_supp Yes

Supports 6 Mbaud 6M_supp Yes

Supports 12 Mbaud 12M_supp Yes

Supports FREEZE control

command Freeze_Mode_supp – – Yes Yes

Supports SYNC control

command Sync_Mode_supp Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supports autobaud search Auto_Baud_supp Yes

Software-settable station

number Set_Slave_Add_supp No

Length of user-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data_Len 5 Byte

User-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H ,00H

Modular station Modular_Station No

32DO, 8RO,

8DI/8DO and

8DI/8DO HWA

Type Files and GSD Files

A-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules: 16DI/16DO,

24DI/8DO and 24DI/8DO 0.2 ms.

Table A-5 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-16DI/16DO, ET 200B-24DI/8DO,

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms

Characteristic DP Keyword to

EN 50170, Part 3 16DI/16DO 24DI/8DO 24DI/8DO

0.2ms

Manufacturer ID Ident_Number 000AH000FH000EH

Supports 9.6 kbaud 9.6_supp Yes

Supports 19.2 kbaud 19.2_supp Yes

Supports 93.75 kbaud 93.75_supp Yes

Supports 187.5 kbaud 187.5_supp Yes

Supports 500 kbaud 500_supp Yes

Supports 1.5 Mbaud 1.5M_supp Yes

Supports 3 Mbaud 3M_supp Yes

Supports 6 Mbaud 6M_supp Yes

Supports 12 Mbaud 12M_supp Yes

Supports FREEZE control

command Freeze_Mode_supp Yes Yes Yes

Supports SYNC control

command Sync_Mode_supp Yes Yes Yes

Supports autobaud search Auto_Baud_supp Yes

Software-settable station

number Set_Slave_Add_supp No

Length of user-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data_Len 5 Byte

User-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H ,00H

Modular station Modular_Station No

16DI/16DO,

24DI/8DO and

24DI/8DO 0.2ms

Type Files and GSD Files

A-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules: 16DI-AC,

16DO-AC, 16RO-AC and 8DI/8RO-AC.

Table A-6 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-16DI-AC, ET 200B-16DO-AC,

ET 200B-16RO-AC, ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC

Characteristic DP Keyword to

EN 50170, Part 3 16DI-AC 16DO-AC 16RO-AC 8DI/8RO-

Manufacturer ID Ident_Number 0019 H001AH001CH001DH

Supports 9.6 kbaud 9.6_supp Yes

Supports 19.2 kbaud 19.2_supp Yes

Supports 93.75 kbaud 93.75_supp Yes

Supports 187.5 kbaud 187.5_supp Yes

Supports 500 kbaud 500_supp Yes

Supports 1.5 Mbaud 1.5M_supp Yes

Supports 3 Mbaud 3M_supp Yes

Supports 6 Mbaud 6M_supp Yes

Supports 12 Mbaud 12M_supp Yes

Supports FREEZE control

command Freeze_Mode_supp Yes – – Yes

Supports SYNC control

command Sync_Mode_supp – Yes Yes Yes

Supports autobaud search Auto_Baud_supp Yes

Software-settable station

number Set_Slave_Add_supp No

Length of user-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data_Len 5 Byte

User-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H ,00H

Modular station Modular_Station No

16DI-AC, 16DO-AC,

16RO-AC and

8DI/8RO-AC

Type Files and GSD Files

A-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules: 4/8AI, 4AI

and 4AO.

Table A-7 Characteristics according to EN 50170, Part 3 for ET 200B-4/8AI, ET 200B-4AI, ET 200B-4AO

Characteristic DP Keyword to

EN 50170, Part 3 4/8AI 4AI 4AO

Manufacturer ID Ident_Number 801AH8019H8018H

Supports 9.6 kbaud 9.6_supp Yes

Supports 19.2 kbaud 19.2_supp Yes

Supports 93.75 kbaud 93.75_supp Yes

Supports 187.5 kbaud 187.5_supp Yes

Supports 500 kbaud 500_supp Yes

Supports 1.5 Mbaud 1.5M_supp Yes

Supports 3 Mbaud 3M_supp Yes

Supports 6 Mbaud 6M_supp Yes

Supports 12 Mbaud 12M_supp Yes

Supports FREEZE control

command Freeze_Mode_supp Yes Yes –

Supports SYNC control

command Sync_Mode_supp – – Yes

Supports autobaud search Auto_Baud_supp Yes

Software-settable station

number Set_Slave_Add_supp No

Length of user-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data_Len see Appendix C

User-specific data

(parameterization telegram) User_Prm_Data see Appendix C

Modular station Modular_Station No

4/8AI, 4AI and 4AO

Type Files and GSD Files

A-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Type Files and GSD Files

B-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Configuration Telegram

If you use configuration software such as COM ET 200 or STEP 7, you can

ignore this chapter.

If you address ET 200B modules via a configuration telegram for example

with CP 5431 as DP master, you can consult this chapter for details of how to

structure the configuration telegram for the various types of ET 200B mod-

ule.

Applicability

In this Chapter

B-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The configuration telegram for digital modules consists of 2 bytes.

The structure of the configuration telegram for digital ET 200B modules is as

follows:

Table B-1 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Digital ET 200B Modules

Slot Byte n

Slot 1 - Output area of the digital module (byte 0) See Table B-2

Slot 2 - Input area of the digital module (byte 1)

Table B-2 contains all IDs (hexadecimal) for the digital ET 200B modules.

Table B-2 IDs for Digital ET 200B Modules

Digital Module Order Number ID Consis- Address

Address

tency Scope

(Bytes)

Area

Byte 0 Byte 1

)

Byte

Slot 0

Byte

Slot 1 O I

ET 200B-16DI 6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0 00 11 Byte – 2 digital

ET 200B-32DI 6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0 00 13 Byte – 4 digital

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0

ET 200B-16DO 6ES7 132-0BH00-0XB0 21 00 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-16DO/2A 6ES7 132-0BH10-0XB0 21 00 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-32DO 6ES7 132-0BL00-0XB0 23 00 Byte 4 – digital

ET 200B-8DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BH00-0XB0 20 10 Byte 1 1 digital

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA 6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0 21 10 Byte 2 1 digital

ET 200B-16DI/16DO 6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0 21 11 Byte 2 2 digital

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BN00-0XB0 20 12 Byte 1 3 digital

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms 6ES7 133-0BN10-0XB0

ET 200B-8RO 6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0 20 00 Byte 1 – digital

ET 200B-16DI-AC 6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0 00 11 Byte – 2 digital

ET 200B-16DO-AC 6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0 21 00 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-16RO-AC 6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0 21 00 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC 6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0 20 10 Byte 1 1 digital

Structure for Digi-

tal Modules

IDs for Digital

ET 200B

Configuration Telegram

B-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The length of the configuration telegram for analog modules depends on the

type of configuration.

The structure of the configuration telegrams for analog ET 200B modules is

as follows:

Table B-3 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Analog ET 200B Modules

Slot Byte

nn + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4

Slot 1 (virtual only) (n = 0) 04 00 00 AD C4

Slot 2 (virtual only) (n = 5) 04 00 00 9B 40

Slot 3 (virtual only) (n = 10) 04 00 00 8F C0

Slots 4 to 11 – input and output areas of the analog module

(n = 15, n = 20, ... n = 50) See Table B-4

Table B-4 contains all IDs (hexadecimal) for the analog ET 200B modules

Table B-4 IDs for Analog ET 200B Modules

Analog Module (Or-

der No : 6ES7 )

Slot Byte1

der No.: 6ES7 ...) nn + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4

ET 200B-4/8AI Configuration for entire module (8AI):

4 43 47 00 15 C5

Configuration by channels (1 AI to 8 AI):

443 40 00 15 C2

5 to

11 43 40 00 95 C2

ET 200B-4AI Configuration for entire module (4AI):

4 43 43 00 15 C4

Configuration by channels (1 AI to 4 AI):

443 40 00 15 C2

5 to

743 40 00 95 C2

ET 200B-4AO Configuration for entire module (4AO):

4 83 43 00 25 D0

Configuration by channels (1 AO to 4 AO):

4 83 40 00 25 D0

5 to

783 40 00 A5 D0

1n = 15: slot 4 ... n = 50: slot 11

Structure forAna-

log Modules

IDs for Analog

ET 200B

Configuration Telegram

B-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

You want to configure an ET 200B-4AO with two output channels (channels

0 and 1).

The configuration telegram consists of 25 bytes, as follows:

04 00 00 AD C4 04 00 00 9B 40 04 00 00 8F C0 83 40 00 25 D0 83 40 00 A5 D0

4AO. channel 0

slot 4

virtual

slot 1 virtual

slot 2 virtual

slot 3 4AO. channel 1

slot 5

Example of a Con-

figuration Tele-

gram

Configuration Telegram

C-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Parameterization Telegram

If you use configuration software such as COM ET 200 or STEP 7, you can

ignore this chapter.

If you parameterize ET 200B modules via a parameterization telegram for

example with CP 5431 as DP master, you can consult this chapter for details

of how to structure the parameterization telegram for the various types of

ET 200B module.

Section Describes Page

C.1 Structure of the parameterization telegram C-2

C.2 Standard part of the parameterization telegram C-3

C.3 Parameters for status C-4

C.4 Parameters for analog input modules C-5

C.5 Parameters for analog output module C-10

Applicability

In this Chapter

C-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

C.1 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram

All the parameterizable values of the ET 200B are stored in the parameteriza-

tion telegram.

No settings can be made for digital ET 200B modules via the parameteriza-

tion telegram. 5 bytes must contain ”00H” by default.

The structure of the parameterization telegrams for digital ET 200B modules

is as follows:

00H 00H 00H 00H 00H5 bytes with 00H as default

Standard part (7 bytes) See Section C.2

Figure C-1 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for Digital ET 200B modules

In the case of analog ET 200B modules, you can use the parameterization

telegram to define diagnostics response and set the defaults for analog value

measurement or analog value output, as applicable.

Structure of the parameterization telegram for analog ET 200B modules is as

follows:

Parameters for analog modules (26 bytes)

Parameters for status (3 bytes) See Section C.3

Standard part (7 bytes) See Section C.2

See Sections C.4 and C.5

Figure C-2 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for Analog ET 200B Modules

Definition: Para-

meterization Tele-

gram

Structure for Digi-

tal Modules

Structure for Ana-

log Modules

Parameterization Telegram

C-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

C.2 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram

The first 7 bytes of the parameterization telegram are standardized to

EN 50170, Part 3, and their contents could be as follows:

Byte 3

Watchdog factor 1

Response delay TRDY

Station status

Watchdog factor 2

Manufacturer ID, high byte;

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 4

01H

0BH

08H

06H

80H

Byte 5 Manufacturer ID, low byte

Group IDByte 6 1DH

00H

Figure C-3 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram

Standard Part

Parameterization Telegram

C-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

C.3 Parameters for Status

The next 3 bytes contain the status bytes. The meanings of the parameters are

described in Figure C-4.

The defaults for these three bytes are:

00H 60H 0DH: for 4/8AI and 4AI

00H 20H 0DH: for 4AO

Byte 7 7Bit No.

0: Other DP master

1: DP master in SIMATIC S7/M7

Byte 8 6

Process alarm enable

Byte 9

Startbit monitoring ON

Stopbit monitoring ON

Watchdog base 0: 10 ms

1: 1 ms

000

000000

0100

Fail-safe mode

Bit No.

Diagnostics alarm enable

Bit No.

0: Analog value representation in SIMATIC S5 format

1: Analog value representation in SIMATIC S7/M7

format

0: Operation with S7/M7-DP master

1: Operation with IM 308-C

02543

00: Complement of twos (4/8AI, 4AI)

01: Amount with sign (4/8AI, 4AI)

10: Binary (4AI)

11: Invalid entry

1: Bit is always ”1”

6543

Figure C-4 Parameters for Status

Parameters for

Status

Parameterization Telegram

C-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

C.4 Parameters for Analog Input Modules

The next bytes (bytes 10 to 35) contain the following parameters for

ET 200B-4/8AI and ET 200B-4AI:

Byte 13

S7 constant

Data record number

Block length

Slot

Data record length

Byte 10

Byte 11

Byte 12

Byte 14

5FH

00H

07H

02H

04H

Byte 15 Diagnostics enable

Wire break moni-

tor enable

Byte 16

For bytes

15, 16

See Figure C-6

Byte 20

S7 constant

Data record number

Block length

Slot

Data record length

Byte 17

Byte 18

Byte 19

Byte 21

5FH

01H

13H

0EH

04H

Bytes

22 to 35 Parameters for

analog value

measurement See Figure C-7

For bytes

22 to 35

Figure C-5 Parameters for Analog Input Modules 4/8AI, 4AI

The parameters listed on the following pages refer to channel groups for

ET 200B-4/8AI and to channels for ET 200B-4AI. Table C-1 shows the as-

signment of terminals to channels and channel groups.

Table C-1 Assignment of Terminals to Channel (Groups)

Channel (Group) n 4/8AI 4AI

Channel (group) 0 Channel group 0

(terminals 0.1/0.2, 0.3/0.4) Channel 0

(terminals 0.1/0.2)

Channel (group) 1 Channel group 1

(terminals 1.1/1.2, 1.3/1.4) Channel 1

(terminals 1.1/1.2)

Channel (group) 2 Channel group 2

(terminals 2.1/2.2, 2.3/2.4) Channel 2

(terminals 2.1/2.2)

Channel (group) 3 Channel group 3

(terminals 3.1/3.2, 3.3/3.4) Channel 3

(terminals 3.1/3.2)

Parameters for

4/8AI and 4AI

Channel (Group)

Parameterization Telegram

C-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure C-6 shows the contents of bytes 15 and 16. You activate a parameter

by setting the corresponding bit to”1”.

Bit No.

Byte 15

Diagnostics enable, channel (group) 0

Diagnostics enable, channel (group) 1

Diagnostics enable, channel (group) 2

Diagnostics enable, channel (group) 3

Byte 16

Diagnostics enable, wire

break, channel (group) 0

Diagnostics enable, wire

break, channel (group) 1

Diagnostics enable, wire

break, channel (group) 2

Diagnostics enable, wire

break, channel (group) 3

0000

231

Figure C-6 Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Input Modules 4/8AI, 4AI

Bytes 15, 16

Parameterization Telegram

C-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure C-7 shows the structure of bytes 22 to 35. You activate a parameter by

setting the corresponding bit to”1”.

Note

Representation of the limit values corresponds to analog value representa-

tion. Always bear the limit ranges in mind when setting the limit values.

Byte 22 76 0

Diagnostics alarm enable

Limit-value alarm enable

Byte 23

Channel group 0

Channel group 1

Channel group 3

Channel group 2

Integration time, 4/8AI only;

4AI: byte 23 = 00H

Byte 24

Byte 25

Byte 26

Byte 27

7043 Measurement channel (group) 0

Measurement channel (group) 2

Measurement channel (group) 1

Measurement channel (group) 3

Measurement: range

Measurement: type

Upper limit value,

channel 0

Lower limit value,

channel 0

Upper limit value, chan-

nel 2 (channel 1*)

Lower limit value, chan-

nel 2 (channel 1*)

Low byte

High byte

Byte 28

Byte 29

Byte 30

Byte 31

Byte 32

Byte 33

Byte 34

Byte 35

See Table C-3

See Table C-2

000 0 0

End-of-cycle alarm 4/8AI

7021

6543

* For the ET 200B-4/8AI, only the combination of single channel addressing and

parameterization of channel group 0 for resistance measurement (Pt 100, Ni 100,

R) entails display of ”Upper/lower limit value overshoot” for channel 1. In all other

cases (i.e. module addressing and single channel addressing and parameterization

of channel group 0 for other than resistance measurement (Pt 100, Ni 100, R), ”Up-

per/lower limit value overshoot” is displayed for channel 2.

Figure C-7 Bytes 22 and 35 for Analog Input Modules 4/8AI, 4AI

Bytes 22 to 35

Parameterization Telegram

C-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table C-2 contains the codings for the various integration times that you can

set per channel group in byte 23 for the 4/8AI (see Figure C-7).

Table C-2 Codings for the Integration Times of the 4/8AI

Integration T ime Coding

2.5 ms 2#00

16.7 ms 2#01

20 ms 2#10

100 ms 2#11

Table C-3 lists all measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The table

shows the codings for the type of measurement plus the codings for the corre-

sponding measuring ranges. You must enter the codings for the desired mea-

suring range in bytes 24 to 27 (see Figure C-7).

Table C-3 Codings for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Mod-

ules

Measurement:

Type Coding

(Bits 4 to 7) Measuring Range1Coding

(Bits 0 to 3)

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000

Voltage 2#0001  80 mV (4/8AI)

 250 mV (4/8AI)

 500 mV (4/8AI)

 1 V (4/8AI)

 2.5 V (4AI)

 5 V (4AI)

 1.25 V (4AI)

 10 V (4AI)

2#0001

2#0010

2#0011

2#0100

2#0101

2#0110

2#0100

2#1001

Current 2#0010 0 ... 20 mA (4AI)

4 ... 20 mA (4AI)

 20 mA (4AI)

2#0010

2#0011

2#0100

Resistance 2#0100 48 W(4/8AI)

150 W(4/8AI)

300 W(4/8AI)

600 W(4/8AI)

2#0001

2#0010

2#0100

2#0110

Thermal resis-

tance + linearization 2#1000 Pt 100 standard range (4/8AI)

Ni 100 standard range (4/8AI) 2#0010

2#0011

Integration Time

Type of Measure-

ment and Measur-

ing Ranges

Parameterization Telegram

C-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table C-3 Codings for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Mod-

ules, continued

Measurement:

Type Coding

(Bits 0 to 3)

Measuring Range1

Coding

(Bits 4 to 7)

Thermal elements

with linearization 2#1110 Type N [NiCrSi – NiSi] (4/8AI)

Type E [NiCr – CuNi] (4/8AI)

Type J [Fe CuNi IEC] (4/8AI)

2#0001

2#0010

2#0101

Type J [Fe – CuNi IEC] (4/8AI)

Type L [Fe – CuNi DIN] (4/8AI)

Type T [Cu – CuNi IEC] (4/8AI)

2#0101

2#0110

2#0111

ype [Cu CuN C] ( /8 )

Type K [NiCr – Ni] (4/8AI)

Type U [Cu – CuNi DIN](4/8AI)

2#1000

2#1001

1The measuring ranges apply only to the modules in parentheses.

Parameterization Telegram

C-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

C.5 Parameters for Analog Output Module

The next bytes (bytes 10 to 35) contain the following parameters for

ET 200B-4AO:

Byte 13

S7 constant

Data record number

Block length

Slot

Data record length

Byte 10

Byte 11

Byte 12

Byte 14

5FH

00H

07H

02H

04H

Byte 15 Diagnostics enable

Reserved

Byte 16

For bytes

15, 16

See Figure C-9

Byte 20

S7 constant

Data record number

Block length

Slot

Data record length

Byte 17

Byte 18

Byte 19

Byte 21

5FH

01H

13H

0EH

04H

Byte 22

to 35 Parameters for

analog value

output See Figure C-10

For bytes

22 to 35

Figure C-8 Parameters for Analog Output Module 4AO

In the tables on the next pages, the parameters for ET 200B-4AO apply to

channels. Table C-4 shows the assignment of terminals to channels

Table C-4 Assignment of Terminals to Channels

Channel n Terminals on 4AO

Channel 0 Terminals 0.1/0.2

Channel 1 Terminals 1.1/1.2

Channel 2 Terminals 2.1/2.2

Channel 3 Terminals 3.1/3.2

Parameters for

4AO

Channel

Parameterization Telegram

C-11

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure C-9 shows the contents of bytes 15 and 16. You activate a parameter

by setting the corresponding bit to”1”.

Bit No.

Byte 15

Diagnostics enable, channel 0

Diagnostics enable, channel 1

Diagnostics enable, channel 2

Diagnostics enable, channel 3

Byte 16 70

0000

00000000

Not relevant

Figure C-9 Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Output Module 4AO

Bytes 15, 16

Parameterization Telegram

C-12 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Figure C-10 shows the structure of bytes 22 to 35. You activate a parameter

by setting the corresponding bit to”1”.

Byte 22 76 0

Byte 23

Channel 0

Channel 1

Channel 3

Channel 2

Dummy value; keep last value

Byte 24

Byte 25

Byte 26

Byte 27

7043 Output, channel 0

Output, channel 2

Output, channel 1

Output, channel 3

Output: range

Output: type

Dummy value channel 0

Dummy value channel 1

Dummy value channel 2

Dummy value channel 3

Low byte

High byte

Byte 28

Byte 29

Byte 30

Byte 31

Byte 32

Byte 33

Byte 34

Byte 35

70321

Diagnostics alarm enable

See Table C-5

0 = Dummy value

1 = Keep last value

00000

000

Figure C-10 Bytes 22 to 35 for Analog Output Module 4AO

Note

Representation of the dummy values corresponds to analog value representa-

tion. Bear the applicable range limits in mind when setting the dummy val-

ues.

Bytes 22 to 35

Parameterization Telegram

C-13

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table C-5 lists all output ranges of the analog output module. The table

shows the codings for the type of output plus the codings for the correspond-

ing output ranges. You must enter the codings for the desired output range in

bytes 24 to 27 (see Figure C-10).

Table C-5 Codings for Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module

Output: Type Coding

(Bits 4 to 7) Output Range Coding

(Bits 0 to 3)

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000

Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V

 10 V 2#1000

2#1001

Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

 20 mA

2#0010

2#0011

2#0100

Type of Output

and Output

Ranges

Parameterization Telegram

C-14 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Parameterization Telegram

D-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

You do not need the information in this chapter unless you want to replace

old ET 200B modules that you configured with COM ET 200 V4.x with the

new ET 200B modules (order numbers: see Appendix F) described in this

manual.

You can easily replace old ET 200B modules with the new ET 200B modules

without having to reconfigure and parameterize the modules.

You can also configure the new ET 200B modules with the type files under

COM ET 200 V4.x.

When used in conjunction with the IM 308-B and COM ET 200 V 4.x, the

new modules behave like the old ET 200B modules they replace with regard

to configuration and diagnostics.

The names of the type files needed for COM ET 200 V4.x are listed in Ap-

pendix A.1. (see also Table 4-1)

In case you do not have access to the previous edition of this manual, the

most important information for configuring with COM ET 200 V 4.x is sum-

marized below.

In Section you will find on Page

D.1 Status and error indication by LEDs D-2

D.2 Slave diagnostics D-3

D.3 Configuration options D-11

D.4 Setting the operating mode with COM ET 200 V4.x D-12

If information on these topics would be redundant, you will find a reference

to the corresponding section of the manual on COM ET 200 Windows.

The manual ET 200 Distributed I/O System (Order No.: 6ES5 998-3ES.1)

contains detailed information on how to use COM ET 200 V4.x.

Introduction

Compatibility

Type Files

In this Chapter

Additional In-

formation

D-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs

See Table 5-1, Section 5.2.

The table below explains the meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs

on analog ET 200B modules for configuration with COM ET 200 V4.x.

Table D-1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings

LED RUN LED BF LED DIA Meaning Remedy

Off Off Off Voltage not applied to mod-

ule.

Check the power supply.

Check that the electronics

block is correctly mounted

on the terminal block.

Lit (green) Off Off Module is on the PROFIBUS-

DP and is exchanging data. -

Lit (green) Lit (red) or off Lit (red) An error has occurred on the

module (e.g. parameterization

incorrect, wire break, measur-

ing range overshot)

Read the diagnostics buffer

to identify the error, see

Sections 5.3 and D.2

If there is no diagnostics in-

formation in the buffer,

check parameterization to

ascertain whether the diag-

nostics alarm and corre-

sponding channel diagnos-

tics have been enabled.

Lit (green) Flashing (red) Off Either

Module has not received a

parameterization tele-

gram, or telegram is incor-

rect.

Incorrect bus protocol

Module has received in-

correct configuration data.

Check the configuration in

the DP master (station

number, station type).

Check the configuration.

Lit (green) Flashing (red) Lit (red) Module has received incorrect

parameterization or configura-

tion telegram.

Check parameterization and

configuration.

Lit (green) Flashes once

(red) Off Module is powering up. -

Lit (green) Lit (red) No signifi-

cance Baud rate matching in prog-

ress.

Check the PROFIBUS-DP

connection.

Check the DP master.

Error Indication,

Digital ET 200B

Error Indication,

Analog ET 200B

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.2 Slave Diagnostics

This section contains information on slave diagnostics of ET 200B in opera-

tion with IM 308-B.

Section Describes Page

D.2.1 General information on slave diagnostics, operation with

IM 308-B D-4

D.2.2 Structure of slave diagnostics D-6

D.2.3 Structure of device-related diagnostics (analog ET 200B) D-8

In this Section

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.2.1 General Information on Slave Diagnostics, Operation with

IM 308-B

Diagnostics are loaded word by word in the STEP5 application program and

transferred to the diagnostics word. (The load and transfer operations always

refer in the following to the default diagnostics address 252).

In the case of page addressing, the diagnostics word is on the ”basic page”.

Before requesting diagnostics in the case of page addressing, you must first

”switch” to the basic page.

Basic Structure of the STEP 5 Listing for Diagnostics:

STL Explanation

L KB (basic page number)

T PY 255

L KY (station number),(code)

T PW 252

L PW 252

L KH (hex-code: no error)

!=F

BEC

JC FBx

Page selection

(basic page number: nx16, n=0,1,..)

Load diagnostics (station number:

3...99, code: ³ Table D-2 and D-3) and

transfer to the diagnostics word (diag-

nostics word: here PW 252).

Evaluate diagnostics word (hex-code: ³

Section D.2.2)

Error?

Evaluate error in FBx.

Handling a request for slave diagnostics corresponds to general access to

diagnostics data for the IM 308-B and is described in detail in the manual

ET 200 Distributed I/O System (Order No. 6ES5 998-3ES.1).

The following is an example of how to request slave diagnostics with the

STEP5 application program and place the data in the diagnostics word.

Requesting Slave

Diagnostics

More Information

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

This example shows how to request station status 1 and 2.

Program the following in STEP 5:

STL Explanation

L KY n,0

T PW 252

L PW 252

L KH 000C

!=F

BEC

JC FBx

Store in the ”Diagnostics address” byte

the number of the slave station (n =

station number) from which the station

status is to be requested; store the

code for ”station status 1 and station

status 2” (code = 0) in the ”Diagnos-

tics address +1” byte.

Load the diagnostics word

Response monitoring activated

No error?

Evaluate error in FBx.

Example: Request-

ing Diagnostics

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.2.2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics

16 bytes per slave are reserved for slave diagnostics. These 16 bytes are orga-

nized in 8 words.

The 2 diagnostics bytes of the diagnostics word are referred to below as the

”Diagnostics address” and ”Diagnostics address +1”.

The table below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for digital ET 200B

modules:

Table D-2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B, Operation with

IM 308-B

Code Diagnostics address Diagnostics address +1

0Station status 1 (byte 0) Station status 2 (byte 1)

1 Station status 3 (byte 2) Master station number (byte 3)

2Manufacturer ID (high) (byte 4 ) Manufacturer ID (low) (byte 5)

3Header (byte 6)

(device-related diagnostics) Device-related diagnostics (byte 7)

(group diagnostics)

4 Free Free

5 Free Free

6 Free Free

7 Free Free

You will find the information you need on slave diagnostics for digital

ET 200B modules in the following sections.

You will find on Section

General information on slave diagnostics, operation with IM 308-B D.2.1

Structure of station status 1 to 3 5.3.4

Structure of the master station number and manufacturer ID 5.3.5

Structure of device-related diagnostics (digital ET 200B) 5.3.6

Introduction

Digital ET 200B

More Information,

Digital ET 200B

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The table below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for analog ET 200B

modules:

Table D-3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B, Operation with

IM 308-B

Code Diagnostics address Diagnostics address +1

0Station status 1 (byte 0) Station status 2 (byte 1)

1 Station status 3 (byte 2) Master station number (byte 3)

2Manufacturer ID (high) (byte 4 ) Manufacturer ID (low) (byte 5)

3Header (byte 6)

(device-related diagnostics) Device-related diagnostics (byte 7)

(reserved)

4 Device-related diagnostics (byte 8)

(reserved) Device-related diagnostics (byte 9)

(type of error)

5Device-related diagnostics (byte 10)

(always: 15H)Device-related diagnostics (byte 11)

(wrong station type)

6Device-related diagnostics (byte 12)

(EPROM or ADC/DAC error) Device-related diagnostics (byte 13)

(channel type)

7Device-related diagnostics (byte 14)

(always: 08H)Device-related diagnostics (byte 15)

(number of channels)

You will find the information you need on slave diagnostics for analog

ET 200B modules in the following sections.

you will find in Section

General information on slave diagnostics, operation with IM 308-B D.2.1

Structure of station status 1 to 3 5.3.4

Structure of the master station number and manufacturer ID 5.3.5

Structure of device-related diagnostics (analog ET 200B) D.2.3

Analog ET 200B

More Information,

Analog ET 200B

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.2.3 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B)

The structure of device-related diagnostics for configuring the analog mod-

ules with COM ET 200 V4.x is described below.

In essence, this section is comparable with Section 5.3.8 of this manual.

No ID-related diagnostics are displayed in operation with COM ET 200 V4.x.

Analog modules configured with COM ET 200 V4.x do not support alarms

(diagnostics alarm, process alarm).

The device-related diagnostics for an analog ET 200B shows you the error

reported by the ET 200B. The header indicates the length of device-related

diagnostics.

Note

Chapter 8 contains a discussion of ”Supplementary Bits” in the section deal-

ing with analog value representation: these bits contain additional diagnos-

tics information.

The analog ET 200B modules contain the following information in the

”Header (device-related diagnostics)” byte.

Byte 6 70

Bit No.

Length of device-related diagnostics incl. byte 6:

Code for device-related diagnostics

000

0AH (= 10 bytes)

Figure D-1 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics) for Analog ET200B

Introduction

Diagnostics Alarm,

Process Alarm

Device-Related

Diagnostics

Header (Byte 6)

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Device-related diagnostics of the analog ET 200B modules comprises 9 by-

tes:

Byte 7

Byte 8

Byte 9 to

15 Diagnostics data (see

Tables D-4 to D-6)

00H: Reserved

Figure D-2 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 7 to

15)

Table D-4 shows the structure and contents of bytes 9 to 12.

Table D-4 Diagnostics Data, Bytes 9 to 12

Byte Bit Meaning Byte Bit Meaning

0Diagnostics message waiting 0 Wrong ET 200B station type

1Internal error 1 Reserved

2External error, e.g. wire break 2 Reserved

(³3Channel error

3 Reserved

(

Tab.

4 Reserved

5 Reserved 5 Reserved

6 Reserved 6 Reserved

7Incorrect parameters in module 7 Reserved

0 to

Module

class

0101 Analog module 0 Reserved

3 class 1 Reserved

2EPROM error (4AI)

3 Reserved

4Channel information waiting

4ADC/DAC error (4AO)

5 Reserved 5 Reserved

6 Reserved 6 Reserved

7 Reserved 7 Reserved

Device-Related

Diagnostics

Bytes 9 to 12

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The possible values for byte 9 are as follows:

Table D-5 Possible Values for Byte 9

Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning

00H0 0 0 0 No error

03H (83H) 0 0 1 1 Internal error, no channel error;(incorrect parameters in the module)

0BH (8BH) 1 0 1 1 Internal error,channel error;(incorrect parameters in the module)

0DH1 1 0 1 External error, channel error

0FH (8FH)1 1 1 1 Summation error of all the above errors;(incorrect parameters in the mod-

ule)

Table D-6 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 15.

Table D-6 Diagnostics Data, Bytes 13 to 15

Byte Bit Meaning Remark

0 to Channel type 71 H

4/8AI, 4AI

4AO

73H4AO

14 0 to

7Number of diagnostics bits output per

channel by a module. 08H4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

15 0 to

7Number of channels of a module. 04 H

08H

4AI, 4AO

4/8AI

Possible Values,

Byte 9

Bytes 13 to 15

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-11

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.3 Configuration Options

Table D-7 shows the possible IDs for configuring the ET 200B modules with

COM ET 200 V4.x. The following address IDs are possible for ET 200B:

Table D-7 IDs for ET 200B

Module Order Number Address ID Consist-

ency Address

Scope

(Bytes)

Address

Area

Slot 0 Slot 1 O I

ET 200B-16DI 6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0 000 017 Byte – 2 digital

ET 200B-32DI 6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0 000 019 Byte – 4 digital

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0

ET 200B-16DO 6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0 033 000 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-16DO/2A 6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0 033 000 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-32DO 6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0 035 000 Byte 4 – digital

ET 200B-8DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0 8DA or 032 8DE or 016 Byte 1 1 digital

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA 6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0 033 8DE or 016 Byte 1 1 digital

ET 200B-16DI/16DO 6ES7 132-0BL00-0XB0 033 017 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-24DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0 8DA or 032 018 Byte 1 3 digital

ET 200B-24DI/8DO

0.2ms 6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0

ET 200B-8RO 6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0 032 000 Byte 1 – digital

ET 200B-16DI-AC 6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0 000 017 Byte – 2 digital

ET 200B-16DO-AC 6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0 033 000 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-16RO-AC 6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0 033 000 Byte 2 – digital

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC 6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0 8DA or 032 8DE or 016 Byte 1 1 digital

ET 200B-4/8AI 6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0 087 – Word – 16 analog

ET 200B-4AI 6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0 4AE or 083 – Word – 8 analog

ET 200B-4AO 6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0 099 – Word 8 – analog

IDs

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-12 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

D.4 Setting the Operating Mode with COM ET 200 V4.x

The structure of the parameterization telegram for configuring with

COM ET 200 V4.x is described below.

In the case of digital ET 200B modules, no settings can be made by means of

the parameterization telegram. When you open the ”DP Slave Parameteriza-

tion Telegram” dialog box, 5 bytes are assigned ”00H” by default.

Note

In the case of digital ET 200B modules, do not overwrite the 5 bytes which

default to ”00H” in the parameterization telegram.

In the case of analog ET 200B modules, you can use the parameterization

telegram to define diagnostics response and set the defaults for analog value

measurement or analog value output, as applicable.

When parameterizing with COM ET 200 V4.x you enter only the user-spe-

cific part of the parameterization telegram (without standard part) in the KH

format (”DP Slave Parameterization Telegram” dialog box).

When you open the ”DP Slave Parameterization Telegram” dialog box for the

first time, the parameterization telegram is structured and contains certain

defaults, as shown below.

For ET 200B-4/8AI:

DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION TELEGRAM

Byte (input in KH format)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

0  13 00 00 00 00 00 AA 14 14 14

10  14 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 06

20  FF 00 00 00 00

For ET 200B-4AI:

DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION TELEGRAM

Byte (input in KH format)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

0  13 00 00 00 00 00 00 19 19 19

10  19 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 06

20  FF 00 00 00 00

Introduction

Structure for Digi-

tal Modules

Structure for Ana-

log Modules

Defaults and

Structure of the

Parameterization

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-13

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

SFor ET 200B-4AO:

DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION TELEGRAM

Byte (input in KH format)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

0  13 00 00 00 00 00 00 19 19 19

10  19 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 06

20  FF 00 00 00 00

Note

As regards parameterization of the functions of the analog modules, only the

bytes with borders ”j” in the Figures are of relevance.

All other bytes contain ”00H” or COM ET 200 V4.x-specific codes that you

must leave unchanged.

The meanings of the bytes with borders ”j” in the figures above are as fol-

lows:

Table D-8 Content and Meanings of the Bytes in the Parameterization Telegram

Byte Breakdown Code

3Diagnostics message enable per channel (group).

Bit 0 = channel (group) 0

Bit 1 = channel (group) 1

Bit 2 = channel (group) 2

Bit 3 = channel (group) 3

Bit is ”1”: Diagnostics message enabled

Bit is ”0”: Diagnostics message disabled (default)

4Wire break monitor enable, only ET 200B-4/8AI with selected value range Pt 100, thermocouple or voltage

sensor  80 mV

Bit 0 = channel group 0

Bit 1 = channel group 1

Bit 2 = channel group 2

Bit 3 = channel group 3

Bit is ”1”: Diagnostics message enabled

Bit is ”0”: Diagnostics message disabled (default)

(If wire break occurs, the overflow bit is also set.)

4/8AI

6Setting for integration time, ET 200B-4/8AI only

AAH

55H

Integration time 20 ms for 50 Hz supply (default)

Integration time 16.7 ms for 60 Hz supply 4/8AI

4/8AI

Parameters for

Analog Modules

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

D-14 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table D-8 Content and Meanings of the Bytes in the Parameterization Telegram, continued

Byte CodeBreakdown

7, 8, 9,

Setting for analog value range

10 Byte 7 = channel (group) 0

Byte 8 = channel (group) 1

Byte 9 = channel (group) 2

Byte10 = channel

(group)3

19H

18H

16H

15H

14H

13H

12H

11H

 10 V (default)

0 ... 10 V

 5 V

 2.5 V

 1.25 V, for ET 200B-4AI

 1 V, for ET 200B-4/8AI (default)

 0.5 V

 0.25 V

 80 mV

4AI, 4AO

4AO

4AI

4/8AI

24H

22H

23H

 20 mA

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

4AI, 4AO

82H

E5H

E8H

E6H

Pt 100 Standard

Thermocouple Type J with linearization

Thermocouple Type K with linearization

Thermocouple Type L with linearization

4/8AI

23 Selection for measured-value representation (ET 200B-4AI and ET 200B-4/8AI only)

00H

01H

02H

Complement of twos

Amount and sign

Binary

4AI, 4/8AI

4AI

Configuring with COM ET 200 V4.x

E-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

You do not need the information in this chapter unless you want to replace

old analog modules that you configured with the type file SIxxxxAE.200

under COM ET 200 Windows with the new analog modules (order numbers:

see Appendix F) described in this manual.

If you use the type file SIxxxxBE.200 for configuring under COM ET 200

Windows, you can ignore this chapter (see also Table 4-1).

You can easily replace old analog modules with the new analog modules

without having to reconfigure and parameterize the modules.

You can also configure the new analog modules with the type file SIx-

xxxAE.200 under COM ET 200 Windows.

When configured with SIxxxxAE.200, the new modules behave like the old

analog modules they replace with regard to configuration and diagnostics.

The names of the type files needed for COM ET 200 Windows are listed in

Appendix A.1.

The two type-file versions SIxxxxAE.200 and SIxxxxBE.200 evince differ-

ences with regard to configuration, parameterization and diagnostics informa-

tion.

In case you do not have access to the previous edition of this manual, the

points in which the newer version of the type file differs from the SIx-

xxxAE.200 are described below.

In Section you will find on Page

E.1 Status and error indication by LEDs E-2

E.2 Structure of device-related diagnostics (analog ET 200B) E-3

E.3 Configuration options E-7

E.4 Parameters for the analog modules E-8

Introduction

Compatibility

Type Files

In this Chapter

E-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

E.1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs

The table below explains the error indications for analog ET 200B modules

for configuration with the type file SIxxxxAE.200.

The table below explains the meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs

on analog ET 200B modules.

Table E-1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings

LED RUN LED BF LED DIA Meaning Remedy

Off Off Off Voltage not applied to mod-

ule.

Check the power supply.

Check that the electronics

block is correctly mounted

on the terminal block.

Lit (green) Off Off Module is on the PROFIBUS-

DP and is exchanging data. -

Lit (green) Lit (red) or off Lit (red) An error has occurred on the

module (e.g. wire break, mea-

suring range overshot)

Read the diagnostics buffer

to identify the error, see

Sections 5.3 and E.2

If there is no diagnostics in-

formation in the buffer,

check parameterization to

ascertain whether the diag-

nostics alarm and corre-

sponding channel diagnos-

tics have been enabled.

Lit (green) Flashing (red) Off Either

Module has not received a

parameterization telegram,

or telegram is incorrect.

Incorrect bus protocol

Module has received in-

correct configuration data.

Check the configuration in

the DP master (station

number, station type).

Check the configuration.

Lit (green) Flashing (red) Lit (red) Module has received incorrect

parameterization or configura-

tion data.

Check parameterization and

configuration

Lit (green) Flashes once

(red) Off Module is powering up. -

Lit (green) Lit (red) No signifi-

cance Baud rate matching in prog-

ress.

Check the PROFIBUS-DP

connection.

Check the DP master.

Introduction

Error Indication,

Analog ET 200B

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

E.2 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics (Analog ET 200B)

The structure of device-related diagnostics for configuring the analog mod-

ules with the type file SIxxxxAE.200 is described below.

In essence, this section is comparable with Section 5.3.8 of this manual. All

other information on slave diagnostics with the IM 308-C applies as de-

scribed in Section 5 above.

No ID-related diagnostics are displayed for configuration with SIx-

xxxAE.200.

Analog modules configured with SIxxxxAE.200 do not support alarms (diag-

nostics alarm, process alarm).

The device-related diagnostics for an analog ET 200B shows you the error

reported by the ET 200B. The header indicates the length of device-related

diagnostics. (see Figure 5-2)

Note

Chapter 8 contains a discussion of ”Supplementary Bits” in the section deal-

ing with analog value representation: these bits contain additional diagnos-

tics information.

The analog ET 200B modules contain the following information in the

”Header (device-related diagnostics)” byte.

Byte 6 70

Bit No.

Length of device-related diagnostics incl. byte 6:

Code for device-related diagnostics

000

13H (19 Byte): 4/8AI

0FH (15 bytes): 4AI, 4AO

Figure E-1 Structure of the Header (Device-Related Diagnostics) for Analog ET200B

Introduction

Diagnostics Alarm,

Process Alarm

Device-Related

Diagnostics

Header (Byte 6)

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Device-related diagnostics of the analog ET 200B modules comprises a max-

imum of 18 bytes:

Byte 7

Byte 8

Bytes 9

to 24 Diagnostics data (see

Tables E-2 to E-5)

00H: Reserved

Figure E-2 Structure of Device-Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B (Bytes 7 to

24)

Table E-2 shows the structure and contents of bytes 9 to 12.

Table E-2 Diagnostics Data, Bytes 9 to 12

Byte Bit Meaning Byte Bit Meaning

0Diagnostics message waiting 0 Wrong ET 200B station type

1Internal error 1 Reserved

2External error, e.g. wire break 2 Reserved

(³3Channel error

3 Reserved

(

Tab.

4 Reserved

5 Reserved 5 Reserved

6 Reserved 6 Reserved

7Incorrect parameters in module 7 Reserved

0 to

Module

class

0101 Analog module 0 Reserved

3 class 1 Reserved

2EPROM error (4AI)

3 Reserved

4Channel information waiting

4ADC/DAC error (4AO)

5 Reserved 5 Reserved

6 Reserved 6 Reserved

7 Reserved 7 Reserved

Device-Related

Diagnostics

Bytes 9 to 12

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The possible values for byte 9 are as follows:

Table E-3 Possible Values for Byte 9

Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning

00H0 0 0 0 No error

03H (83H) 0 0 1 1 Internal error, no channel error;(incorrect parameters in the module)

0BH (8BH) 1 0 1 1 Internal error, channel error;(incorrect parameters in the module)

0DH1 1 0 1 External error, channel error

0FH (8FH)1 1 1 1 Summation error of all the above errors;(incorrect parameters in the mod-

ule)

Table E-4 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 16.

Table E-4 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics Alarm

Byte Bit Meaning Remark

0 to Channel type 71 H

4/8AI, 4AI

4AO

73H4AO

14 0 to

7Number of diagnostics bits output per

channel by a module. 08H4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

15 0 to

7Number of channels of a module. 04 H

08H

4AI, 4AO

4/8AI

Channel error vector:

0 Channel error, channel 0 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

1Channel error, channel 1 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

2Channel error, channel 2 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

16 3Channel error, channel 3 4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO

4Channel error, channel 4 4/8AI

5 Channel error, channel 5 4/8AI

6 Channel error, channel 6 4/8AI

7 Channel error, channel 7 4/8AI

17 to 241-Channel-specific errors see Table E-5

1The number of bytes depends on the number of channels in the module.

Possible Values,

Byte 9

Bytes 13 to 16

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table E-5 shows the assignment of the diagnostics byte for an analog input or

analog output channel.

Table E-5 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input/Analog Output Channel

Byte Bit Analog Input Channel (4/8AI,

4AI) Analog Output Channel (4AO)

0Configuration/parameterization error

1Common-mode error (4/8AI only) ”0” (Reserved)

2”0” (Reserved)

as of 3”0” (Reserved) Ground short-circuit

17 4Wire-break/feed-current monitoring: measuring transducer/Pt 1001

5”0” (Reserved) ”0” (Reserved)

6Measuring range undershoot ”0” (Reserved)

7Measuring range overshoot ”0” (Reserved)

1In the case of the ET 200B-4/8AI, a ”wire break” error is superimposed on common-

mode and measuring-range errors occurring at the same time (common-mode and mea-

suring-range errors are not signaled).

Analog Channel

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

E.3 Configuration Options

The information in this section applies to the type file SIxxxxAE.200.

Table E-6 shows the possible IDs for configuring analog modules with

COM ET 200 Windows.

Single channel addressing is not possible with the type file SIxxxxAE.200.

Table E-6 Possible IDs for Configuring Input and Output and Areas

Module Order Number Slot 0 Length For- Meaning

mat

ET 200B-4/8AI 6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0 8AI 8 Word All channels are transferred.1

ET 200B-4AI 6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0 4AI 4 Word All channels are transferred.1

ET 200B-4AO 6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0 4AO 4 Word All channels are transferred.1

1The address assigned is the start address for the entire module

Type File

IDs

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

E.4 Parameters for Analog Modules

Table 8-9 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B-4/8AI

with COM ET 200 Windows.

You can set these parameters for the ET 200B-4/8AI if you use the type file

SI801AAE.200.

Table E-7 Parameters for ET 200B-4/8AI (6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0)

Parameter Explanation Value Range

Diagnostics enable for channel group 0

(channels 0, 1) Diagnostics messages enabled separately for

each channel group:

onl fth l it th

Disable

Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel group 1

(channels 2, 3)

only for thermocouples, resistance thermome-

ters (Pt 100, Ni 100) and voltage sensors 

80 mV

Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel group 2

(channels 4, 5)

Diagnostics enable for channel group 3

(channels 6, 7)

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 0 (channels 0, 1) Wire break monitoring enabled separately for

each channel group Disable

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 1 (channels 2, 3)

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 2 (channels 4, 5)

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel group 3 (channels 6, 7)

Integration time for module Enter an optimum integration time for the

A/D converter to help suppress noise voltage. 16.7 ms

20 ms

Measurement type and range for channel

group 0 (channels 0, 1) You can set the measurement type and range

separately for each channel group

For voltage measurement:

1V

Measurement type and range for channel

group 1 (channels 2, 3)

For

voltage

measurement:



 0.5 V

 0.25 V

80 mV

Measurement type and range for channel

group 2 (channels 4, 5) For resistance thermometer with linearization:

For thermocouple with external reference

jti

Pt 100 standard range

T J ith li i ti



Measurement type and range for channel

group 3 (channels 6, 7)

junction: Type J with linearization

Type L with linearization

Type K with linearization

Representation of measured values Sets representation of the measured values for

module SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

Measured value representation Sets data format for analog value representa-

tion, SIMATIC S5 Complement of twos

Amount with sign

: Default

Parameters for

ET 200B-4/8AI

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-9

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-40 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B-4AI

with COM ET 200 Windows.

You can set these parameters for the ET 200B-4AI if you use the type file

SI8019AE.200.

Table E-8 Parameters for ET 200B-4AI (6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0)

Parameter Explanation Value Range

Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa-

rately for each channel

Disable

Diagnostics enable for channel 1 rately for each channel Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel 2

Diagnostics enable for channel 3

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 0 Wire break monitoring enabled sepa-

rately for each channel for measuring

420A

Disable

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 1

range 4 ... 20 mA

Enable

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 2

Wire break monitoring enable for

channel 3

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel 0 You can set the measurement type and

range separately for each channel

For voltage measurement:

10 V

Channel not activated

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel 1

For voltage measurement:  10 V

 5 V

 2.5 V

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel 2 For current measurement:



 1.25 V

 2

Measurement type and range for chan-

nel 3

For current measurement:



0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

Representation of measured values Sets representation of the analog mea-

sured values for module SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

Measured value representation Sets data format for analog value repre-

sentation, SIMATIC S5 Complement of twos

Amount with sign

Binary

: Default

Parameters for

ET 200B-4AI

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

E-10 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Table 8-58 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B-4AO

with COM ET 200 Windows.

You can set these parameters for the ET 200B-4AO if you use the type file

SI8018AE.200.

Table E-9 Parameters for ET 200B-4AO (6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0)

Parameter Explanation Explanation

Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa-

rately for each channel

Disable

Diagnostics enable for channel 1 rately for each channel Enable

Diagnostics enable for channel 2

Diagnostics enable for channel 3

Output type and range for channel 0 Type and range of output defined sepa-

rately for each channel

Output type and range for channel 1 For voltage output:  10 V

0 ... 10 V

Output type and range for channel 2 For current output:  20 mA

020mA

Output type and range for channel 3

...

4 ... 20 mA

Representation of output values Sets representation of the analog values

for module SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

: Default

Parameters for

ET 200B-4AO

Analog Modules and Old Type Files

F-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Order Numbers

If you require additional components for your ET 200B system or want to

expand your PROFIBUS-DP, you will find the order numbers of the compo-

nents you need in this chapter.

The components are listed in two groups:

ET 200B components

Accessories for PROFIBUS-DP; the entries are accompanied by refer-

ences to the various manuals for the PROFIBUS-DP master and configu-

ration software.

Section Describes Page

F.1 Order numbers for ET 200B components F-2

F.2 Order numbers for PROFIBUS-DP accessories F-4

Introduction

In this Chapter

F-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

F.1 Order Numbers for ET 200B Components

The following types of electronics block are available:

Table F-1 Order Numbers, Electronics Blocks for ET 200B

Electronics Block Order Number Description

ET 200B-16DI 6ES7 131-0BH00-0XB0 Inputs: 16 DC 24 V (3 ms)

ET 200B-32DI 6ES7 131-0BL00-0XB0 Inputs: 32 DC 24 V (3 ms)

ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms 6ES7 131-0BL10-0XB0 Inputs: 32 DC 24 V (0.2 ms)

ET 200B-16DO 6ES7 132-0BH01-0XB0 Outputs: 16 DC 24 V (0.5 A/2 A)

ET 200B-16DO/2A 6ES7 132-0BH11-0XB0 Outputs: 16 DC 24 V (2 A)

ET 200B-32DO 6ES7 132-0BL01-0XB0 Outputs: 32 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-8DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BH01-0XB0 Inputs: 8 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA 6ES7 133-0BH10-0XB0 Inputs: 8 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)/hardware shut-

down

ET 200B-16DI/16DO 6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0 Inputs: 16 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 16 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET200B-24DI/8DO 6ES7 133-0BN01-0XB0 Inputs: 24 DC 24 V (3 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET200B-24DI/8DO 0.2ms 6ES7 133-0BN11-0XB0 Inputs: 24 DC 24 V (0.2 ms)

Outputs: 8 DC 24 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-8RO 6ES7 132-0GF00-0XB0 Outputs: 8 REL. DC 24 ... 60 V

ET 200B-16DI-AC 6ES7 131-0HF00-0XB0 Inputs: 16 AC 120/230 V

ET 200B-16DO-AC 6ES7 132-0HF00-0XB0 Outputs: 16 AC 120/230 V (0.5 A)

ET 200B-16RO-AC 6ES7 132-0HH00-0XB0 Outputs: 16 REL.AC 120 V/DC 24 ... 150 V

ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC 6ES7 133-0HH00-0XB0 Inputs: 8 AC 120/230 V

Outputs: 8 REL.AC 120 V/DC 24 ... 150 V

ET 200B-4/8AI 6ES7 134-0KH01-0XB0 8 analog differential inputs or 4 x Pt 100 (measuring

principle: integrating)

ET 200B-4AI 6ES7 134-0HF01-0XB0 4 analog differential inputs

(Measuring principle: successive approximation)

ET 200B-4AO 6ES7 135-0HF01-0XB0 4 analog outputs

Electronic Blocks

Order Numbers

F-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

The following types of terminal block are available:

Table F-2 Order Numbers, Terminal Blocks for ET 200B

Terminal Block Order Number Description

TB1/DC 6ES7 193-0CA10-0XA0 16 channels, screw terminals, 3 tiers

TB1-4/DC 6ES7 193-0CA20-0XA0 16 channels, screw terminals, 4 tiers

TB2/DC 6ES7 193-OCB10-0XA0 32 channels, screw terminals, 3 tiers

TB2-4/DC 6ES7 193-0CB20-0XA0 32 channels, screw terminals, 4 tiers

TB3/DC 6ES7 193-0CA30-0XA0 16 channels, spring-latching terminals

TB4/DC 6ES7 193-0CB30-0XA0 32 channels, spring-latching terminals

TB4M/DC 6ES7 193-0CE30-0XA0 32 channels, spring-latching terminals with 4th termi-

nal tier for extra ground connections

TB6/AC 6ES7 193-0CC10-0XA0 16 channels, screw terminals, 3 tiers

TB8-analog 6ES7 193-0CD40-0XA0 4-/8 channels, spring-latching terminals

You can order additional sets of labeling strips under the following order

numbers:

Table F-3 Order Numbers, Labeling Strips

Labeling Strips for Set of Order Number

16DI, 16DO, 8DI/8DO, 8DI/8DO HWA 10 6ES7 193-0BB00-0XA0

32DI, 32DI 0.2ms 32DO, 16DI/16DO,

24DI/8DO, 24DI/8DO 0.2ms 76ES7 193-0BD00-0XA0

8RO 10 6ES7 193-0BA00-0XA0

16DO/2A 7 6ES7 193-0BC00-0XA0

16DI-AC, 16DO-AC, 16RO-AC, 8DI/8RO 7 6ES7 193-0BF00-0XA0

4/8AI, 4AI, 4AO 10 6ES7 193-0BE00-0XA0

Terminal Blocks

Labeling Strips

Order Numbers

F-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

F.2 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS-DP Accessories

This section contains a list of the order numbers for the PROFIBUS-DP ac-

cessories you need for ET 200B.

It also contains lists of the various manuals that you may need, depending on

the PROFIBUS-DP master in use.

Table F-4 shows all the network components for the ET 200 distributed I/O

system that you may need in conjunction with ET 200B.

Table F-4 Accessories for the ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Accessory Order Number

RS 485 repeater, PROFIBUS-DP, IP 20 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0

Bus connectors

without programmer adapter (max. 12 MB)

with programmer adapter (max. 12 MB)

without programmer adapter, without terminating

resistor (max. 1.5 MB)

6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

Bus cables

Normal

Drum

Underground

6XV1 830-0AH10

6XV1 830-3BH10

6XV1 830-3AH10

Repeater adapters 6GK1 510-1AA00

Optical link modules for fiber-optic waveguides 6GK1 502-3AB00

6GK1 502-4AB00

PROFIBUS-DP dropline 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

Introduction

Network Compo-

nents for ET 200

Order Numbers

F-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

In order to program and start up an ET 200B with COM ET 200, you will

need one of the manuals listed in Table F-5.

Table F-5 Manuals for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5

Manual Contents

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

(6ES5 988-3ES.1)

Description of the IM 308-B master interface for S5-115U, S5-135U and

S5-155U

Use of COM ET 200 V4.x

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

(6ES5 988-3ES.2)

Description of the IM 308-C master interface for S5-115U, S5-135U and

S5-155U

Description of the S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP master interface

Use of COM ET 200 Windows

Working with the FB IM308C

In order to program and start up an ET 200B with STEP 7, you require the

manuals listed in Table F-6.

To order manuals with 6ES7 order numbers: see Catalog ST 70

Table F-6 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7

Manual Contents

S7-300 Programmable Controller

Hardware and Installation Topics including

Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of the CPU 315-2 DP

Structuring the PROFIBUS-DP network

Bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters

M7-300 Programmable Controller

Hardware and Installation Topics including

Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interfaces in M7-300

Structuring the PROFIBUS-DP network

Bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable

Controllers

Module Specification

Topics including

Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interfaces in S7-400 and M7-400

Structuring a PROFIBUS-DP network

Bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters

System Software for S7-300 and

S7-400

Program Design

Programming Manual

Topics including description of addressing and diagnostics in SIMATIC S7

System Software for S7-300 and

S7-400

System and Standard Functions

Reference Manual

Description of the SFCs in STEP 7

Manuals for ET 200

in SIMATIC S5

Manuals for

STEP 7 and SI-

MATIC S7

Order Numbers

F-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Order Numbers

Glossary-1

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Glossary

Data transmission rate; specifies the number of bits transferred per second

(baud rate = bit rate).

ET 200 supports baud rates from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud.

Common transmission path connecting all stations; has two defined ends.

In ET 200 the bus is a two-wire cable or a waveguide.

Physical connection between bus station and bus cable.

ET 200 has bus connectors with and without adapter for programming de-

vice/PC and having IP 20 and IP 65 protection ratings.

³ Segment

Device which can send or receive data via the bus or amplify this data, e.g.

DP master, DP slave, RS 485 repeater, active star coupler.

The entire range of interconnected inactive parts of a device that are not sub-

ject to any dangerous touch voltages even in the event of a fault.

You set the input/output circuit of analog modules by means of the coding

plugs.

The setting of the coding slide switch on the ³ terminal block determines

which ³ electronics block can be connected.

Baud rate

Bus

Bus connector

Bus segment

Bus station

Chassis ground

Coding plug

Coding slide

switch

Glossary-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Assigning addresses for the inputs/outputs of a slave station.

A DP master can send commands simultaneously to a group of slaves to syn-

chronize the slave stations.

Event-driven synchronization of slave stations is possible using the control

commands ³ FREEZE and ³ SYNC.

Programming device interface for connection to SINEC L2 and to SI-

NEC L2-DP. The CP 5410 S5-DOS/ST can be plugged into only the PG 730,

740, 750 and 770 programming devices.

The highest level of slave-specific diagnostics. Device-related diagnostics

refers to the entire slave.

The detection, pinpointing, classification and further evaluation of errors,

faults, malfunctions and signals.

Diagnostics provides monitoring functions which run automatically while the

system is in operation. This enhances plant availability by reducing setup

times and outages.

ET 200 supports a number of diagnostics options ranging from an overview

of the DO slaves which have reported diagnostics down to monitoring of in-

dividual channels.

Modules having diagnostics capability report systems to the central CPU by

means of diagnostics alarms.

In SIMATIC S7/M7: When an error is detected or disappears (e.g. wire

break), the module triggers a diagnostics alarm if alarms are enabled. The

CPU interrupts processing of the application program or lower priority

classes and processes the diagnostics alarm block (OB 82).

In SIMATIC S5: The diagnostics alarm is mapped within device-related diag-

nostics. Errors such as wire break, etc. are detected by regularly querying the

diagnostics bits of device-related diagnostics.

Configuring

Control command

CP 5410 S5-DOS/

Device-related

diagnostics

Diagnostics

Diagnostics alarm

Glossar

Glossary-3

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

An input/output device used not in the central device but installed at a con-

siderable distance from the CPU. Distributed I/O stations include:

ET 200M, ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U

DP/AS-I Link

S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface

Other DP slaves from Siemens or other vendors

The distributed I/O stations connect to the DP master via the PROFIBUS-DP

bus.

A ³ master which behaves in accordance with standard EN 50170, Part 3 is

known as a DP master.

A ³ slave which operates on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS-DP proto-

col and which behaves in accordance with standard EN 50170, Part 3, is a DP

slave.

Upper section of the ET 200B distributed I/O station. The electronics block

contains the logic and plugs into the ³ terminal block.

The ET 200 distributed I/O system with the PROFIBUS-DP protocol is a bus

for connecting distributed I/O to a CPU or an adequate DP master. ET 200 is

characterized by fast reaction times since only small amounts of data (bytes)

are transferred on the bus.

ET 200 is based on the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170, Part 1, and the PRO-

FIBUS-DP standard, EN 50170, Part 3.

ET 200 operates on the master/slave principle. DP masters can be, for exam-

ple, the IM 308-C master interface module or the CPU 315-2 DP.

DP slaves can be the ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200M, ET 200U distributed I/O

stations or Siemens DP slaves or other-vendor devices.

The reference potentials of control and load circuits are galvanically isolated

in the case of floating I/O modules; this is achieved, for example, by means

of optocouplers, relay contacts or line transformers. Input and output circuits

may be grouped.

Distributed I/O sta-

tion

DP master

DP slave

Electronics block

ET 200

Floating

Glossar

Glossary-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Each signal line has its own signal reference line.

Floating-ground measurement is required,

if the sensors are connected to different potentials and

if different signal sources are physically apart.

A ³control command issued by the DP master to a group of DP slaves.

When it receives the FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the

current status of the inputs and transmits this information cyclically to the

DP master.

Every time it receives a FREEZE control command, the DP slave re-freezes

the status of its inputs.

The input data is not again cyclically transmitted by the DP slave to the DP

master until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.

All signal reference lines are run to a common ³ reference potential.

Device master data file; file in which the slave-specific characteristics such

as number of inputs or outputs, number of diagnostics bits, SYNC-capability,

etc. are defined. There is a GSD file for every Siemens DP standard slave.

You need this file only if you want to connect a DP standard slave to a DP

master that is not a Siemens product. If you are using a Siemens DP master

you do not need a GSD file. The device master data for Siemens DP masters

is defined in the ³ type file (COM ET 200-specific format).

Degree of protection to DIN 40050: protection against touch with the fingers

and ingress of foreign bodies having a diameter larger than 12mm.

When in possession of the token, the master can send data to other stations

and request data from other stations (= active stations).

³ DP masters include, for example the CPU 315-2 DP and the IM 308-C.

Floating-ground

measurement

FREEZE

Ground-referenced

measurement

GSD file

IP 20

Master

Glossar

Glossary-5

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Module for distributed configuration. The distributed I/O ”connects” to the

PLC via the IM 308-C master interface module.

Bus access method in which only one station is the ³ DP master and all

other stations are ³ DP slaves.

The reference potentials of control and load circuits are electrically con-

nected in the case of non-floating I/O modules.

Each DP slave has one parameterization master. On startup, the parameter-

ization master downloads the parameterization data to the DP slave. The

parameterization master has read and write access to the DP slave and can

change the configuration of a DP slave.

A process alarm is triggered by S7 modules with interrupt capability in re-

sponse to certain events in the process. The process alarm is reported to the

central CPU. The appropriate organization block is then processed, in accor-

dance with the priority of the interrupt.

In SIMATIC S7/M7: An operating range is defined, for example by parame-

terizing an upper and lower limit value. If the process signal (e.g. tempera-

ture) of an analog input module exists this range, the module triggers a pro-

cess alarm if alarms are enabled. The CPU interrupts processing of the

application program or lower priority classes and processes the process alarm

block (OB 40).

In SIMATIC S5: The process alarm is mapped within device-related diagnos-

tics. Errors such as upper limit-value overshoot, etc. are detected by regularly

querying the diagnostics bits of device-related diagnostics.

PROcess FIeld BUS, German process and field-bus standard, defined by the

PROFIBUS standard (EN 50170). It specifies the functional, electrical and

mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial field bus system.

PROFIBUS is a bus system which networks PROFIBUS-compatible automa-

tion systems and field devices on the cell and field levels. PROFIBUS ver-

sions support the protocols DP (= Dezentrale Peripherie, distributed I/O),

FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification) or TF (= Technological Functions).

Master interface

module

Master/slave

method

Non-floating

Parameterization

master

Process alarm

PROFIBUS

Glossar

Glossary-6 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

PROFIBUS system supporting the DP protocol. DP stands for ”dezentrale

Peripherie”, or distributed I/O. The ET 200 distributed I/O system is based on

the PROFIBUS-DP standard (EN 50170, Part 3).

Siemens also uses the designation ”SINEC L2-DP” for PROFIBUS-DP.

A conductor required as a protective measure against electric shock currents.

The symbol for the protective ground conductor is PE.

Potential in relation to which the voltages of the circuits concerned are con-

sidered and/or measured.

A slave parameter in COM ET 200. If a slave station is not addressed within

the response monitoring time, it automatically goes to the safe state, i.e. all

outputs are set to ”0”.

The bus cable between two terminating resistors forms a segment. A segment

contains 0 ... 32 ³ bus stations. Segments can be linked by ³ repeaters.

A conductive connection, caused by a fault, between conductors that are live

in normal operation if no load resistance is inserted in the faulty circuit.

Each ET 200 bus station must be assigned a station number. The program-

ming device is addressed at station number ”0”.

Masters and slaves are assigned station numbers in the range 3 ... 125. Excep-

tion: ET 200B is assigned a station number in the range 3 ... 99.

Programming language for generating application programs for SIMATIC S7

controllers.

A ³ control command issued by the master to a slave.

Using this control command, the master can freeze the outputs at the instan-

taneous value. The output data for the subsequent frames is stored, but the

statuses of the outputs remain unchanged. The outputs are not updated until

the master sends the UNSYNC control command.

PROFIBUS-DP

Protective ground

conductor

Reference poten-

tial

Response monitor-

ing time

Segment

Short-circuit

Station number

STEP 7

SYNC

Glossar

Glossary-7

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

A ³ control command issued by the DP master to a group of DP slaves.

Using this control command, the DP master instructs the DP slave to freeze

the outputs at the instantaneous value. In subsequent frames the slave stores

the output data, but the statues of the outputs remain unchanged.

Every time it receives a SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the out-

puts it had stored as output data.

The outputs are not again cyclically updated until the DP master sends the

UNSYNC control command.

The terminal block carries the hard wiring. The ³ electronics block plugs

into the terminal block.

Resistor for matching the impedance of bus cables; terminating resistors are

always required at the ends of cables or segments.

In ET 200 the terminating resistors are activated/deactivated in ³ bus con-

nectors.

File required by COM ET 200 for configuring a slave station. The type file

contains the definitions of the slave-specific characteristics, for example

number of inputs or outputs, number of diagnostics bytes, SYNC capability,

etc.

Each ET 200B station type has its own type file, which is generated by Sie-

mens, forms a component part of COM ET 200 (version 4.1 and later) or is

supplied with the manual.

A break in the lines to a sensor or a fault in the sensor itself.

SYNC

Terminal block

Terminating resis-

tor

Type file

Wire break

Glossar

Glossary-8 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Glossar

Index-1
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
Index
A
accessories, order numbers, F-4
ADC/DAC error , 5-20
analog value representation SIMATIC S7
ET 200B-4/8AI, 8-26, 8-39
ET 200B-4AO, 8-87
ET 200B-4AI, 8-70
analog value representation, SIMATIC S5
ET 200B-4/8AI, 8-26
ET 200B-4AO, 8-85
ET 200B-4AI, 8-65
B
bus cable, order number, F-4
bus connector, 3-26, 7-13
bus interface, wiring, 3-26
C
CE, certification, 6-3
certification
CE, 6-3
FM, 6-3
UL/CSA, 6-3
channel error, 5-19, 5-21
channel information, 5-20
channel type, 5-21
coding plugs, 3-9, 8-23, 8-62, 8-83
coding slide switch, 3-9
COM ET 200 V4.x, D-1
common-mode error, analog output module,
5-21
conductor cross sections, 3-23
configuration
grounded, 3-17
ungrounded, 3-20
configuration error, analog output module, 5-21
configuration telegram
analog ET 200B, B-3
digital ET 200B, B-2
configuring, 4-1
connecting loads, ET 200B-4AO, 8-78
connecting transducers
ET 200B-4/8AI, 8-7
ET 200B-4AI, 8-53
D
device-related diagnostics
analog ET 200B, 5-18
digital ET 200B, 5-14
diagnostics
operation with IM 308-C, 5-6
operation with S7/M7 DP masters or other
PROFIBUS-DP masters, 5-8
device-related diagnostics, analog, 5-18
device-related diagnostics, digital, 5-14
ID-related diagnostics, analog, 5-16
manufacturer ID, 5-13
master station number, 5-13
operation with IM 308-B, D-4
slave diagnostics, 5-5
station status 1 to 3, 5-11
dismantling, 3-14
E
electronics block, 1-3
characteristics, 1-6
definition, 1-6
design, 2-4
installing, 3-12
EPROM error, 5-20
error
ADC/DAC, 5-20
EPROM, 5-20
error diagnostics
by LEDs, 5-3
slave diagnostics, 5-5
ET 200B, 1-3

Index-2 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
ET 200B-16DI
block diagram, 7-16
characteristics, 7-15
pin assignment, 7-18
technical data, 7-19
ET 200B-16DI-AC
block diagram, 7-75
characteristics, 7-74
pin assignment, 7-76
technical data, 7-78
ET 200B-16DI/16DO
block diagram, 7-63, 7-64
characteristics, 7-62
pin assignment, 7-65
technical data, 7-67
ET 200B-16DO
block diagram, 7-27, 7-28
characteristics, 7-26
pin assignment, 7-29
technical data, 7-31
ET 200B-16DO-AC
block diagram, 7-80
characteristics, 7-79
pin assignment, 7-81
technical data, 7-83
ET 200B-16DO/2A
block diagram, 7-33, 7-34
characteristics, 7-32
pin assignment, 7-35
technical data, 7-37
ET 200B-16RO-AC
block diagram, 7-85
characteristics, 7-84
pin assignment, 7-86
technical data, 7-88
ET 200B-24DI/8DO, ET 200B-24DI/8DO
0.2ms
block diagram, 7-69, 7-70
characteristics, 7-68
pin assignment, 7-71
technical data, 7-73
ET 200B-32DI, ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms
block diagram, 7-21, 7-22
characteristics, 7-20
pin assignment, 7-23
technical data, 7-25
ET 200B-32DO
block diagram, 7-39, 7-40
characteristics, 7-38
pin assignment, 7-41
technical data, 7-43
ET 200B-4/8AI
analog value representation SIMATIC S5,
8-26
analog value representation SIMATIC S7,
8-39
characteristics, 8-5
connecting transducers, 8-7
parameters, 8-24
possible IDs, 8-20
schematic circuit diagram, 8-47
technical data, 8-49
terminal assignment, 8-48
ET 200B-4AI
analog value representation SIMATIC S7,
8-70
analog value representation, SIMATIC S5,
8-65
block diagram, 8-72
characteristics, 8-51
connecting transducers, 8-53
parameters, 8-63
possible IDs, 8-61
technical data, 8-74
terminal assignment, 8-73
ET 200B-4AO
analog value representation SIMATIC S7,
8-87
analog value representation, SIMATIC S5,
8-85
block diagram, 8-89
characteristics, 8-76
connecting loads, 8-78
parameters, 8-84
possible IDs, 8-82
technical data, 8-91
terminal assignment, 8-90
ET 200B-8DI/8DO
block diagram, 7-50, 7-51
characteristics, 7-49
pin assignment, 7-52
technical data, 7-54
ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC
block diagram, 7-90
characteristics, 7-89
pin assignment, 7-91
technical data, 7-93
ET 200B-8RO
block diagram, 7-45, 7-46
characteristics, 7-44
pin assignment, 7-47
technical data, 7-48
Index

Index-3
ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA
block diagram, 7-56, 7-57
characteristics, 7-55
HW cutoff, 7-59
pin assignment, 7-58
technical data, 7-61
external error, 5-19
F
feed-current monitoring, analog output module,
5-21
FM, certification, 6-3
fuse, 3-11
approved, 3-11
changing, 3-11
order numbers, 3-11
G
grounded configuration, 3-17
GSD file, A-4
I
ID ET 200B-4/8AI, 8-20
ET 200B-4AI, 8-61
ET 200B-4AO, 8-82
ID-related diagnostics, analog ET 200B, 5-16
IDs, configuration telegram, B-2, B-3
IM 308-B, D-1
installing
electronics block, 3-12
terminal block, 3-2
internal error, 5-19
L
LEDs, 2-4, 5-3
LEDs for diagnostics, 5-3
M
M-short-circuit, analog output module, 5-21
manufacturer ID, 5-13
master station number, 5-13
module class, 5-20
module defect, 5-19
mounting
on a standard section rail, 3-6
with shield connecting element, 3-7, 3-8
O
order numbers, F-2
P
parameterization error, analog output module,
5-21
parameterization missing, 5-19
parameterization telegram, C-2
analog ET 200B, C-2
digital ET 200B, C-2
parameterizing, 4-1
parameters
ET 200B-4AO, 8-84
ET 200B-4/8AI, 8-24
ET 200B-4AI, 8-63
incorrect in module, 5-19
parameterization telegram, C-2
process alarm lost, 5-20
PROFIBUS-DP interface, 3-26
PROFIBUS-DP dropline, order number, F-4
S
S7-slave, 1-4
shield connecting element, 3-2, 3-5, 3-25
shielding, 3-25
SINEC L2-DP, 1-2
See also PROFIBUS–DP
slave diagnostics, D-3
operation with IM 308-B, D-4
slave diagnostics
operation with IM 308-C, 5-6
operation with S7/M7 DP masters or other
PROFIBUS-DP masters, 5-8
definition, 5-5
device-related diagnostics, analog, 5-18
device-related diagnostics, digital, 5-14
ID-related diagnostics, analog, 5-16
manufacturer ID, 5-13
master station number, 5-13
requesting, 5-10
station status 1 to 3, 5-11
To Next, 5-5
station number, 1-5, 3-9
Index

Index-4 ET 200B Distributed I/O Station
EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c
station status, structure, 5-11
T
technical specifications
ET 200B-16DI, 7-19
ET 200B-24DI/8DO, ET 200B-24DI/8DO
0.2ms, 7-73
ET 200B-32DI, ET 200B-32DI 0.2ms, 7-25
ET 200B-32DO, 7-43
ET 200B-4/8AI, 8-49
ET 200B-4AI, 8-74
ET 200B-4AO, 8-91
ET 200B-8DI/8DO, 7-54
ET 200B-16DI/16DO, 7-67
ET 200B-16DI-AC, 7-78
ET 200B-16DO, 7-31
ET 200B-16DO/2A, 7-37
ET 200B-16DO-AC, 7-83
ET 200B-16RO-AC, 7-88
ET 200B-8DI/8DO HWA, 7-61
ET 200B-8DI/8RO-AC, 7-93
ET 200B-8RO, 7-48
general, 6-1
terminal block, 1-3
characteristics, 1-5
definition, 1-5
design, 2-2
installing, 3-2
TB1-4/DC, 7-6
TB1/DC, 7-5
TB2-4/DC, 7-9
TB2/DC, 7-8
TB3/DC, 7-7
TB4/DC, 7-10
TB4M/DC, 7-1 1
TB6/AC, 7-12
TB8-analog, 8-3
wiring, 3-22
type file, A-2
applications, 4-4
designation, 4-4, A-2
old type files, E-1
provision, A-2
U
UL/CSA, certification, 6-3
ungrounded configuration, 3-20
W
wire break, analog output module, 5-21
wiring
bus interface, 3-26
terminal block, 3-22
Index

ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c



Siemens AG

AUT E 148

Postfach 1963

D–92209 Amberg

Federal Republic of Germany

From:

Your Name: _______________________________

Your Title: ______________________________

Company Name: ______________________________

Street: _______________________________

City, Zip Code: _____________________________

Country: ______________________________

Phone: ______________________________

Please check any industry that applies to you:

Automotive

Chemical

Electrical Machinery

Food

Instrument and Control

Nonelectrical Machinery

Petrochemical

Pharmaceutical

Plastic

Pulp and Paper

Textiles

Transportation

Other _____________

2ET 200B Distributed I/O Station

EW A 4NEB 812 6089-02c

Additional comments:

_____________________________________

Remarks Form

Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness

of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire

and return it to Siemens.

Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range

from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).

1. Do the contents meet your requirements?

2. Is the information you need easy to find?

3. Is the text easy to understand?

4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?

5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables: